JP7312455B2 - playground - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to amusement machines typified by pinball game machines (pachinko machines) and reel game machines (slot machines).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine that initializes information about a game state and a game when settings are changed (for example, Patent Literature 1).

JP 2016-152827 A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the fairness of the game cannot be ensured due to the operation after the setting change specifying that the setting has been changed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which it is difficult to specify whether or not settings have been changed.

In order to solve the above problems, the amusement machine of the present invention includes:
a game control means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states;
setting change means capable of changing setting values with different degrees of advantage;
A game machine comprising a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production,
The setting change means is a means for entering a state in which the setting value can be changed by turning on the power with a predetermined operation,
The plurality of game states include a first game state and a second game state,
The game control means is
Setting the second game state following the first game state,
After the end of the second game state, newly set the first game state,
When the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the first game state is set,
Means for setting any one of a plurality of types of game intervals in the second game state,
The plurality of types of game sections include a first section and a second section that is more advantageous than the first section,
The game control means is a means that may set the second section based on the fact that the first game state is completed and the second game state is set,
The directing means is
A predetermined effect may be executed based on the second section being set by the game control means,
When the second section is set in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the predetermined effect may not be executed,
Means for not executing the predetermined effect when the second interval is set during a period from when the power is turned on without the predetermined operation until the game is played a predetermined number of times,
The effect means may execute the predetermined effect when the second section is set in the second game state initially set after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the presence or absence of setting changes is difficult to specify.

1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with its front door opened. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel in a planar development; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types and names of internal winning combinations; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types and names of internal winning combinations; 4 is a transition diagram of game states of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations in the case of a set value of 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations in the case of a set value of 6; It is a figure which shows the total of the lottery probability of the replay combination for every RT. It is a figure which shows a lottery table. 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; FIG. 16 is a flowchart of state processing (step S109) at the time of game start in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of state B transition processing (step S1003) in FIG. 16; FIG. 17 is a flowchart of state B-related processing (step S1005) at the start of a game in FIG. 16; FIG. 19 is a flowchart of instruction information setting processing (step S1219) in FIG. 18; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of game state update processing (step S121) in FIG. 15; FIG. 20. It is a flowchart of the operation navigation guarantee flag setting process (step S1403) in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a precursor and CZ process (step S1407) in FIG. 20; FIG. 23 is a flowchart of CZ addition determination processing (step S1605) in FIG. 22; FIG. 21 is a flowchart of AR state update processing (step S1409) in FIG. 20; 21 is a flowchart of state B update processing (step S1423) in FIG. 20; FIG. 26 is a flowchart of MY counter update processing (step S1903) in FIG. 25; 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (d) is a flowchart of the command processing (step S307) in (a). FIG. 28D is a flowchart of internal winning command processing (step S343) when an internal winning command is received in FIG. 28(d). It is a flowchart of the game state update command process (step S343) when the game state update command is received in FIG.28(d). 31 is a flowchart of END effect setting processing (step S3117) in FIG. 30; FIG. 31 is a flowchart of END effect update processing (step S3119) in FIG. 30. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation in the case of internally winning an overlapping combination with a bonus and shifting to state B (an omen is determined at the time of shifting to state B). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the state B transition lottery is won and the CZ and AR lotteries are not won (an omen is confirmed at the time of transition to state B). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a double combination with a bonus is internally won during AR. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when an operation navigation suppression period is set during AR; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the state B transition lottery is won and the CZ and AR lotteries are not won (an omen is confirmed at the time of transition to state B). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the state B transition lottery is won, the number of CZ games of 3 games is obtained, and the AR lottery is not won (an omen and CZ are confirmed at the time of transition to state B). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the state B transition lottery is won, the number of CZ games of 3 games is obtained, and the AR lottery is won and the number of AR rights becomes 1 (prediction, CZ, and AR are determined when transitioning to state B). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the state B transition lottery is won and the CZ and AR lotteries are not won (an omen is confirmed at the time of transition to state B). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the state B transition lottery is won and the CZ and AR lotteries are not won (an omen is confirmed at the time of transition to state B). FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of effects and outcomes in the operation examples of FIGS. 34 to 42; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement in a modification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when operation navigation does not reach the minimum number of times of display in a modified example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when operation navigation does not reach the minimum number of times of display in a modified example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when operation navigation does not reach the minimum number of times of display in a modified example; FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of effects in the operation examples of FIGS. 44 to 47; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the number of games in state B reaches the upper limit and ends. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the MY counter reaches the upper limit and ends in state B; It is a figure which shows the operation example by the establishment timing of the start conditions of END1 production|presentation and END2 production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of scene switching in a continuous effect A consisting of five scenes; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of scene switching in a continuous effect A consisting of five scenes; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of scene switching in a continuous effect A consisting of five scenes; 21 is a flowchart of state B update processing (step S1423 in FIG. 20) in the second embodiment. 56 is a flowchart of MY counter update processing (step S1903 in FIG. 55) in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of the game state update command process (step S343 of FIG.28(d)) in 2nd embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of END effect setting processing (step S3116) in FIG. 57. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement in case END4 production|presentation and END3 production|presentation are performed continuously. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement in case END4 production|presentation and END3 production|presentation are performed continuously. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement in case END4 production|presentation is not performed but END3 production|presentation is performed. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning line. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with its front door opened. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel in a planar development; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types and names of internal winning combinations; 4 is a transition diagram of game states of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations in the case of set values 1 and 6; 4 is a flow chart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller; FIG. 73 is a flow chart of state processing (step S109) at the time of game start in FIG. 72; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the CZ transition mode, and (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of CZ transition games. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of game start state B related processing (step S1031) in FIG. 73; FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of normal related processing (step S1103) in FIG. 75; FIG. 77 is a flowchart of pt acquisition related processing (step S1221) in FIG. 76; (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for winning pts (for normal mode), (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for winning pts (for high probability mode), (c) is a diagram showing a lottery table for pts high probability mode, and (d) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of sets when winning pts in high probability mode. (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for transition to CZ and AT states when reaching 1000pts, (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for transition to AT state in CZ, (c) is a diagram showing a lottery table for distributing BAR rights and pink 7 rights, and (d) is a diagram showing a lottery table for the initial value of the number of AT remaining games. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of CZ-related processing (step S1107) in FIG. 75; 75. (a) is a flowchart of AT-related processing (step S1111) in FIG. 75, and (b) is a flowchart of specialization-related processing (step S1113) in FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for increasing the number of AT remaining games in the AT state, (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for increasing the number of remaining AT games when clearing with conditions, (c) is a diagram showing a lottery table for Blue 7 rights, and (d) is a diagram showing a lottery table for increasing the number of AT remaining games in a specialized zone. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of instruction information setting processing (step S1121) in FIG. 75; FIG. 73 is a flowchart of game state update processing (step S119) in FIG. 72; FIG. FIG. 85 is a flow chart of normal update processing (step S1A03) in FIG. 84; FIG. 85 is a flow chart of update processing during CZ (step S1A07) in FIG. 84; FIG. 84. (a) is a flowchart of update processing during AT (step S1A11) in FIG. 84, and (b) is a flowchart of update processing during specialization (step S1A13) in FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of state B end determination processing (step S1A23) in FIG. 84; 88. (a) is a flowchart of MY counter update processing (step S1E01) in FIG. 88, and (b) is a flowchart of automatic settlement and stop processing (step S1E13) in FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing; (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400, and (d) is a flowchart of the command processing (step S307) in (a). FIG. 91(d) is a flowchart of internal winning command processing (step S343) when an internal winning command is received. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of effect setting processing (step S3013) for each state in FIG. 92; 93. (a) is a flow chart of the first morning effect setting process (step S3115) in FIG. 93, and (b) is a flow chart of the normal middle effect setting process (step S3119) in FIG. FIG. 94 is a flow chart of effect setting processing (step S3103) during CZ in FIG. 93; 93(a) is a flow chart of the effect setting process during AT (step S3107) in FIG. 93, and (b) is a flow chart of the effect setting process during specialization (step S3111) in FIG. It is a flowchart of the game state update command process (step S343) when the game state update command is received in FIG.91(d). (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500, and (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of operation when transitioning from CZ to normal state; FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed by the effect image display device 157 according to the timing chart shown in FIG. 99; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of operation when the cumulative acquisition pt reaches 1000 in a normal state; FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed by the effect image display device 157 according to the timing chart shown in FIG. 101; 9 is a timing chart showing an example of operation after setting change; FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed by the effect image display device 157 according to the timing chart shown in FIG. 103; 4 is a timing chart showing an example of operation when power is turned on without changing settings; FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed by the effect image display device 157 according to the timing chart shown in FIG. 105; 4 is a timing chart showing an example of operation when power is turned on without changing settings; 4 is a timing chart showing an example of operation when power is turned on without changing settings after the power is turned off in state A; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when the cumulative acquired pt reaches 1000 with a difference between the cumulative acquired pt and the display pt; FIG. It is a timing chart which shows an example when winning a conditional addition lottery. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed by the effect image display device 157 according to the timing chart shown in FIG. 110; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of display of a privilege image; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display of privilege images corresponding to clear conditions; It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the condition device number 2 is internally won while the BAR right is acquired during CZ. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the condition device number 3 is internally won while the peach 7 right is acquired during the CZ. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement at the time of internal winning of the condition device number 4 in the state in which the peach 7 right is acquired in CZ. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement at the time of internally winning condition device number 1 in CZ. It is a figure which shows the modification which applied the aim production|presentation in CZ to a bonus. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the condition device number 2 is internally won in the state that the blue 7 right is acquired in the AT state. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement at the time of internally winning condition apparatus number 2 in a specialized zone. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement at the time of internally winning condition device number 3 in a specialized zone. FIG. 120D is a diagram showing an example in which an image suggesting a set value is displayed in addition to notification of the number of additional games, as a modification of FIG. 120(d).

A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<First embodiment>
In the slot machine according to the first embodiment described below, a plurality of reels loaded with a predetermined number of game media and having a plurality of types of symbols on them start to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by a lottery, each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop. If a condition determined by the condition matches a predetermined payout condition, the game medium is put out and the game is finished, and if the condition is not met, the game is finished without putting out the game medium.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) having a plurality of types of patterns arranged on the outer peripheral surface are accommodated in the center inside (not shown) of the main body 101, and are configured to be rotatable inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the first embodiment, a suitable number of patterns are printed on strip members at regular intervals, and the reels 110 to 112 are formed by attaching the strip members to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three times in the vertical direction from the display window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. 2, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 in the figure) is the left reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 in the figure) is the left reel middle stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 in the figure) is the middle reel upper stage symbol, The symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom stage of the middle reel 111 (position 8 in the figure) is the middle reel bottom stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 3 in the figure) is the right reel top stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 6 in the figure) is the right reel middle stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 6 in the figure) is the right reel middle stage symbol and the symbol displayed on the bottom stage of the right reel 112 (illustration is shown in the figure). 9 position) is called a right reel lower stage symbol, and each symbol of each reel 110 to 112 is vertically displayed on each reel 110 to 112 through a display window 113, ie, nine symbols in total. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. Also, in the first embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100, and a light blocking piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the optical sensor. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line for determining whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination, which will be described later with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 shows this winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 of the first embodiment requires three medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than this number, none of the winning lines become effective, and when this number of inserted medals is betted, the winning line L1 becomes effective. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle pay line L1, a right-down pay line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, or a right-increasing pay line composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols may be set as valid pay lines, and the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, BB1, BB2, RB) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that the player is in the RB state or BB state, which will be described later. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp for notifying the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role (details will be described later) which is one of the winning roles in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The state B in-state lamp 190 is a lamp indicating that state B, which will be described later, is set. The lamp 190 during state B is always lit when state B is set and operation navigation occurs, and once lit, it remains lit until state B ends. In the state in which the state B is set and before operation navigation occurs, the light may be turned on at any timing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In the first embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game start lamp 121 for notifying that the game start operation is possible is lit.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 to the outside is provided on the upper part of the production device 160. - 特許庁The effect device 160 is provided with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed on the slot machine 1. It has a structure that appears in front of 00 (player side, front side). In addition to the liquid crystal display device, any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information may be used. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen may be used. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in the first embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in the first embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with its front door opened. The housing 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242 and having an open front. Inside the housing 101, a main control board storage case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the rear plate 242. Below the main control board storage case 210, a reel unit 700 having three reels 110 to 112 is arranged. On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board is arranged. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the lower surface plate 264, a power supply device 252 having a power supply board is arranged above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. Furthermore, it has a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off.

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the housing 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the housing 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113, a production device 160, a production control board (not shown) for controlling the production device 160, and an upper speaker 272 are provided. Below the pattern display window 113, a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals or the like onto a medal tray 161 are provided. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 .

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control section of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control section 300 that controls the progress of a game, a first sub-control section 400 that controls main effects in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control section 300, and a second sub-control section 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control section 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification, so the data capacity of the ROM 306 and RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is limited.

《Main control unit》
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used in the internal lottery for the winning combination, reel pattern arrangement and stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. , WDT (watchdog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz=1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 features a random number occurrence circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical values within the clock signal entered from the crystal oscillator 315a, and an activation signal output circuit 338 that outputs the startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU304 starts gaming control when the startup signal is entered from this activation signal output circuit 338 (starts the main control unit main treatment described later).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal reception sensor for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, payout from medal payout device 180 at each interrupt time. The state of the medal payout sensor for the medals to be played, the optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and detect an insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and become L level each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from the time when it becomes L level until it becomes L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives the motor provided in the medal payout device 180, various lamps 336 (the winning line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the replay lamp 122, and the state B lamp 19. 0. The game medal insertion lamp 129 includes a driving circuit 328 for driving the game start lamp 121, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating a game state) to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped to the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9v in the first embodiment).

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

《Sub-controller》
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on this control command. This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-controller 400, data for controlling the lighting pattern of the backlight, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a plurality of control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-controller 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on this control command. is equipped with The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

《Pattern arrangement》
Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in the first embodiment) of a plurality of types (eight in the first embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the first embodiment, the frame numbered 19 on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon pattern", the frame numbered 20 on the middle reel 111 has a "bell pattern", and the frame numbered 18 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 1 pattern".

The slot machine 100 in the first embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retraction range (less than 5 frames in the first embodiment) from the stop operation position in order to improve the interest of the game.

《Types of winning roles》
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6 and 7 are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination.

Winning hands of the slot machine 100 include special hands 1-3, replay hands 1-11, and small hands 1-23. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in the first embodiment, special combinations 1 to 3 are combinations that transition to a state in which a predetermined profit is awarded to the player (BB operating state and RB operating state described later, see remarks column in FIG. 6). Further, replay combinations 1 to 11 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These special roles 1 to 3 and replay roles 1 to 11 are sometimes called "operating roles". In addition, the “winning” in the first embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the working combination that does not accompany the payout of medals (does not accompany the payout of medals) is displayed on the active line. The special roles 1 to 3 are special roles which are carried over to the next game when not determined as winning, and the other roles are general roles which are not carried over to the next game when not determined as winning.

Special roles 1 and 2 are roles (operating roles) that shift to the BB operating state (RT6) by winning a prize. However, no medals will be paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combinations are "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for special role 1 and "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2" for special role 2. In the following description, the special role 1 may be referred to as "BB1", the special role 2 may be referred to as "BB2", and the special role 1 and the special role 2 may be collectively referred to as "BB".

The special combination 3 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to the RB operating state (RT4) by winning a prize. However, no medals will be paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is "Seven 1-Seven 1-BAR". In the following description, the special role 3 may be referred to as "RB".

When the special combination 1 to 3 is internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won special combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flags corresponding to the special winnings 1 and 2 are set on, the main control part 300 shifts the game state to the BB hit state (RT5), and when the flag corresponding to the RB is set on, the main control part 300 shifts the game state to the RB hit state (RT3). These flags are maintained in the on state until the corresponding working combination is won, and in the next and subsequent games, it becomes easy to win these working combinations. Specifically, even if the special roles 1 to 3 are not won in the games in which the special roles 1 to 3 are internally won, the state in which the special roles 1 to 3 are internally won in the next and subsequent games is brought into a state similar to that in which the corresponding symbol combinations are arranged to easily win the prizes. The inside-BB hitting state and the inside-RB hitting state will be described later.

In addition, when the special winning combination 1 to 3 are internally won while overlapping with another replaying combination or a small winning combination, or when another winning combination is internally won in a winning state, reel stop control is executed so that the symbols constituting the other winning combination are preferentially arranged.

The main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the BB operating state (RT6) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special wins 1 and 2 being displayed. Further, in this BB operating state, when the payout exceeds a predetermined number (300 in case of winning of special role 1, 200 in case of winning of special role 2, see remark column in FIG. 6), the game state is shifted to post-bonus RT (RT7). The post-bonus RT will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the game state to the RB operating state (RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 3 being displayed. Furthermore, in this RB operating state, when a predetermined number of coins (for example, 105) is paid out, the game state is shifted to post-bonus RT (RT7).

The re-playing hands 1 to 11 are prize-winning hands (operating hands) that can be played in the next game without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are as follows: Replay role 1 is "Replay-Replay-Replay", Replay role 2 is "Bell-Replay-Bell", Replay role 3 is "Replay-Replay-Cherry", Replay role 4 is "Replay-Replay-Seven 1", Replay role 5 is "Replay-Replay-Seven 2", Replay role 6 is "Replay-Replay-Bell", and replay. The replay combination 7 is ``Replay-Replay-Watermelon'', the re-play combination 8 is ``Bell-Replay-Seven 1'', the re-play combination 9 is ``Bell-Replay-Seven 2'', the re-play combination 10 is ``Bell-Replay-Cherry'', and the re-play combination 11 is ``Replay-Bell-Bell''. Of the above -mentioned re -play techniques, the reconstructor 1 and 2 are "Normal replays", the re -play tricks 3 to 5 are "promotion replays", "fall replay 2" is called "fall replay 2", re -play tricks 8 to 10 are "fall replay 3", and 11 re -play tricks are "Chance Ray play". There is a case where the reconstructive role 6-10 is collectively referred to as "fall replay". Further, when replay combinations 3 to 5 are won, the state shifts to a replay high probability state (RT2) described later, and when replay combinations 6 to 10 are won, the state shifts to a normal state (RT0) described later.

The replay hands 1 to 11 may be hands that allow the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when a replay wins, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of inserted medals is reset in a medal insertion number storage area to be described later), or the medals inserted in the replay winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small combinations 1 to 23 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are as follows: small win 1 is "BAR-Replay-Replay", small win 2 is "BAR-Replay-Seven 1", small win 3 is "BAR-Replay-Seven 2", small win 4 is "BAR-Replay-Cherry", small win 5 is "BAR-Cherry-BAR", small win 6 is "BAR-Cherry-Watermelon", and small win 7 is "BAR-Replay-Bell". , the minor role 8 is "Cherry-Cherry-Cherry", the minor role 9 is "Cherry-Cherry-Watermelon", the minor role 10 is "Cherry-Watermelon-Bell", the minor role 11 is "Bell-Watermelon-Cherry", the minor role 12 is "Replay-Watermelon-Seven 1", the minor role 13 is "Replay-Watermelon-Seven 2", the minor role 14 is "Replay-BAR-Seven 1", the minor role 15 is "Replay-BAR-Seven 1". Small hand 16 is "Blank 1-BAR-Seven 1", Small hand 17 is "Blank 1-BAR-Seven 2", Small hand 18 is "Blank 1-Watermelon-Seven 1", Small hand 19 is "Blank 1-Watermelon-Seven 2", Small hand 20 is "Blank 1-Seven 1-Cherry", Small hand 21 is "Blank 1-Seven 2-Cherry", Small hand 22 is " Blank 1-BAR-Cherry", and the small combination 23 is "Bell-Bell-Bell". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG.

Among the above small wins, the small win 1 is sometimes called “weak cherry”, the small wins 2 to 4 are “strong cherry”, the small wins 5 to 7 are “determined cherry”, the small wins 8 to 10 are “middle cherry”, the small win 11 is “watermelon”, the small wins 12 to 22 are “single win”, and the small win 23 is sometimes called “bell”. In addition, when a small winning combination of 12 to 22 is won, the game shifts to a preparation state (RT1), which will be described later. The minor combination 23 is a combination that is won regardless of operation conditions (operation timing, operation order) if internally won.

《Types of internally elected roles》
Next, types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 and 9 are diagrams showing types and names of internal winning combinations.

8 and 9 show 34 types of internal winning combinations (condition device numbers 1 to 34), which are combinations of the combinations described in FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by lottery at the start of the game.

Condition device numbers 1 to 16 are all internal winning combinations including special combinations. Of these, condition device numbers 1, 8, and 13 are internal winning combinations in which a special combination is won independently and there is no duplication with other combinations. When these winnings are won internally, it becomes possible to win the corresponding special winnings (transition to RB operating state (RT4) or BB operating state (RT6)), but if no prize is won, it shifts to RB winning state (RT3) or BB winning state (RT5). In this case, it becomes possible to win the special combination 1 to 3 unless another combination is internally won in the next and subsequent games.

On the other hand, condition device numbers 2 to 7, 9 to 12 and 14 to 16 are internal winning combinations in which a special combination and other combinations overlap and are internally won. In the first embodiment, the small combination and the replay combination are configured to be stopped with priority over the special combination. Therefore, in a game in which a special combination and another combination are duplicated and internally won, there is a possibility that this other combination wins (in the case of a replay combination, it always wins), but the special combination does not win. From the next game, the state shifts to the RB inside winning state (RT3) or the BB inside winning state (RT5), and unless another winning combination is internally won in the next and subsequent games, a special combination can be won.

In the RB winning state (RT3) or the BB winning state (RT5), when the internal winning combination is determined, any of the internally winning combinations is preferentially stopped, so the special combination is not won. If the internal winning combination here includes a special combination (condition device numbers 1 to 16), no new flag is set for the special combination, and it is substantially treated as a lost combination. In addition, internal winning combinations (conditional device numbers 2 to 7, 9 to 12, 14 to 16) in which the special combination overlaps with other combinations are treated as being internally won in other combinations excluding the special combination (similarly when referring to the table of FIG. 14, which will be described later), and the other combinations can be stopped. For example, when the condition device number 3 is internally elected, the condition device number 26 is treated as being internally elected. In addition, when there is no internal winning combination (in the case of a loss), or when internal winning is made for the condition device numbers 1, 8, and 13, it is possible to stop the symbols of the special combination.

Condition device numbers 17 to 25 are internal winning hands made up of replayed hands. Of these, when the condition device numbers 19 to 24 are internally won, there is a case where the RT described later is changed. First, condition device numbers 19 to 21 are provided with operating conditions (pressing order here, correct pressing order below) for winning promotion replays (replay hands 3 to 5) respectively. When the stopping operation in the case of internally winning condition device numbers 19-21 matches the pressing order of the respective correct answers, promotion replays (replay combinations 3-5) are won and the replay high probability state (RT2) is entered. On the other hand, when the stop operation does not match the correct order of pressing, a normal replay (replay combination 1 or replay combination 2) is won, but RT does not shift. Next, the condition device numbers 22 to 24 are provided with operating conditions (pressing order here, hereinafter correct pressing order) for avoiding winning of falling replays (replay hands 6 to 10) respectively. If the stop operation in the case of internal winning condition device numbers 22 to 24 matches the pressing order of each correct answer, a normal replay (replay combination 1 or replay combination 2) is won, and RT does not shift. On the other hand, when the stop operation does not match the correct order of pushing, the fall replay (replay combinations 6 to 10) is won and the normal state (RT0) is entered. In the following description, condition device numbers 19 to 24 may be collectively referred to as push order replay.

Condition device numbers 26 to 34 are internal wins made up of small wins. Of these, the condition device numbers 29 to 31 are provided with operating conditions for winning the bell (minor combination 23) (here, pressing order, hereinafter correct pressing order). In the following description, conditional device numbers 29 to 31 may be collectively referred to as push-order bells. In the event that these conditional device numbers 29 to 31 are internally won, if the stop operation matches the pressing order of the respective correct answers, the bell (small winning combination 23) is awarded. On the other hand, when the stop operation does not match the pressing order of the correct answer, the internally won one-piece combination (small combination 12 to 22) other than the bell (small combination 23) is preferentially stopped, and the game shifts to the preparation state (RT1). In the above configuration, if the stop operation does not match the correct pressing order, there is a case where the game is lost, but for example, if the stopping operation does not match the correct pressing order, such as the above-mentioned single role always wins, it may be configured to always win some role. In addition, in the first embodiment, the condition device numbers 29 to 31 are internally won and the bell (small combination 23) is not won (hereinafter referred to as a bell spill, here, one hand (small combination 12 to 22) and lost).

《Types of gaming status (RT)》
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be described. FIG. 10 is a transition diagram of game states of the slot machine 100. As shown in FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured to be able to switch between a plurality of types of states with different degrees of advantage, namely, a normal state, a preparation state, a replay high probability state, an RB winning state, a RB operating state, a BB hitting state, a BB operating state, and an RT after a bonus, and to change the advantage by changing these states to improve the interest of the game. In the following description, this game state may be referred to as RT, and the normal state, preparation state, replay high probability state, RB hitting state, RB operating state, BB hitting state, BB operating state, and post-bonus RT may be referred to as RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, RT5, RT6, and RT7, respectively. Also, when these RTs are switched, the corresponding lottery table is changed (described later). RT is controlled by the main controller 300 .

FIG. 10 shows each of the RTs described above, and their transition conditions are indicated on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is met, RT transitions in the direction of that arrow. These transition conditions include, for example, winning a predetermined winning combination, internal winning of a predetermined winning combination, stop display of a specific symbol combination on a specific winning line, completion of a specified number of games, and payment of a specified number of coins.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations in the case of the set value 1. In FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations in the case of a set value of 6. As shown in FIG. Also, FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the sum of the lottery probabilities of replay hands for each RT.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, except for the case where the game state is RT4 or RT6 (sometimes referred to as "staying"), the lottery value for the internal winning combination (for example, condition device numbers 3, 12, 26, and 28 in FIGS. 11 and 12) differs depending on the setting value (1 to 6 can be set in the first embodiment) except for the replaying combination. Also, when the game status is RT4 or RT6, the lottery value for the internal winning combination is a common lottery value regardless of the set value. As for the replay combination, as shown in FIG. 13, the total lottery value for each RT is different, but there is no difference in the lottery value due to the set value.

In FIGS. 11 and 12, the vertical axis indicates the condition device number of the internal winning combination (condition device), and the horizontal axis indicates the lottery value (size of lottery data range) corresponding to RT for these internal winning combinations.

In the RT to be described later, the internal winning probability of a role is obtained by dividing the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each role from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 by the numerical data (for example, 65536) in the range of the random number acquired at the time of the internal lottery. For example, in the normal state (RT0), the lottery value of the common bell (minor combination 23) of the condition device number 32 is 5000 in any of the settings 1 to 6, and the winning probability (RT0) of the common bell in the normal state is 5000/65536≈7.63%.

Regarding the difference in internal winning probability, there is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the advantage. More specifically, the ball payout rate for settings 1 to 3 (expected number of medals paid out per game / number of medals used per game x 100) is below 100%, and the ball payout rate for settings 4 to 6 is above 100%. That is, settings 4 to 6 are set values that are advantageous to the player.

The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination (internal winning combination) is determined. It should be noted that the staff of the amusement arcade or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values.

Hereinafter, each RT will be described with appropriate reference to the drawings.

<<RT0 (normal state)>>
Among RT0 to RT3, RT5 and RT7, RT0 has the lowest internal winning probability of a replay combination and is the most disadvantageous RT for the player.

There are condition device numbers 1 to 17 and 25 to 32 for internally won hands in RT0. If the winning combination is not won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, the fact that the role was not won may be expressed as "won't win".

FIG. 10 shows that when RT0 is set and the bell is dropped, the game shifts to RT1, when RB wins, it shifts to RT4, and when BB1 or BB2 wins, it shifts to RT6. Also, it is shown that when the game in which the RB is internally won is not won, the process proceeds to RT3, and when the game in which the BB1 or BB2 is internally won is not won, the process proceeds to RT5.

<<RT1 (ready state)>>
RT1 is the RT with the lowest internal winning probability of the replay combination after RT0 among RT0 to RT3, RT5 and RT7.

There are condition device numbers 1 to 17, 19 to 21, and 25 to 32 in RT1 internally won hands.

FIG. 10 shows that when RT1 is set and promotion replay (replay roles 3 to 5) is won, the game shifts to RT2, when RB is won, the game shifts to RT4, and when BB1 and BB2 are won, the game shifts to RT6. Also, it is shown that when the game in which the RB is internally won is not won, the process proceeds to RT3, and when the game in which the BB1 or BB2 is internally won is not won, the process proceeds to RT5.

<<RT2 (high probability of replay)>>
RT2 has a higher probability of winning a replay role than RT0 and RT1, and is an RT that is more advantageous than RT0 and RT1.

There are condition device numbers 1 to 18 and 22 to 32 for the internally won hands in RT2.

FIG. 10 shows that when RT2 is set and a bell is dropped, the game moves to RT1, when a falling replay (replay combination 6 to 10) is won, the game moves to RT0, when RB wins, the game moves to RT4, and when BB1 or BB2 wins, the game moves to RT6. Also, it is shown that when the game in which the RB is internally won is not won, the process proceeds to RT3, and when the game in which the BB1 or BB2 is internally won is not won, the process proceeds to RT5.

《RT3 (Inside RB)》
RT3 is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to RB is set to ON. This RT3 is more advantageous than RT0 because it is easier to transition to RT4 than RT0 and the probability of winning a replay role is higher than RT0.

There are condition device numbers 17 and 25 to 34 in RT3 for internally won hands. In fact, conditional device numbers 1 to 16 may also be selected, but since they are replaced with conditional device numbers corresponding to those excluding BB1, BB2, and RB, as a result, conditional device numbers 17, 25 to 34 will be selected. FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 show lottery values in consideration of this. In addition, when the winning combination is not internally won in RT3 (in the case of losing), the player can perform a stop operation at a predetermined timing to display the symbol combination corresponding to RB.

FIG. 10 shows that when RB is won in RT3 (when a symbol combination corresponding to RB is displayed), the process proceeds to RT4.

<<RT4 (RB operation state)>>
RT4 has a higher probability of winning a common bell (minor combination 23) than RTs other than RT6, and is an advantageous RT that facilitates the acquisition of medals.

The conditional device number 32 is the only internal winning combination in RT4. A common bell that is internally won with the conditional device number 32 is a combination that wins a bell regardless of operation conditions (operation timing, operation order) if internally won.

FIG. 10 shows that in RT4, when the payout exceeds the specified number (105, see the remarks column in FIG. 6), the process proceeds to RT7.

In the first embodiment, RT4 ends when a specified number of payouts is executed, but for example, it may end when a predetermined winning combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) is won, or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) is played.

<<RT5 (hit state in BB)>>
RT5 is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to either BB1 or BB2 is set to ON. This RT5 is more advantageous than RT0 because it is easier to shift to RT6 than RT0 and the probability of winning a replay role is higher than RT0.

There are condition device numbers 17, 25 to 34 in the internal winning combination in RT5. In fact, conditional device numbers 1 to 16 may also be selected, but since they are replaced with conditional device numbers corresponding to those excluding BB1, BB2, and RB, as a result, conditional device numbers 17, 25 to 34 will be selected. FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 show lottery values in consideration of this. When the winning combination is not internally won in RT5 (in the case of loss), the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing to display the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 or BB2 corresponding to the internal winning flag set to ON.

FIG. 10 shows that when either BB1 or BB2 is won in RT5 (when a symbol combination corresponding to either BB1 or BB2 is displayed), the process proceeds to RT6.

<<RT6 (BB operation state)>>
RT6 has a higher probability of winning a common bell (minor combination 23) than the other RTs except RT4, and is an advantageous RT that facilitates the acquisition of medals. Also, since it continues until more payouts than RT4 are made, it is the most advantageous RT.

The conditional device number 32 is the only internal winning combination in RT5. A common bell that is internally won with the conditional device number 32 is a combination that wins a bell regardless of operation conditions (operation timing, operation order) if internally won.

FIG. 10 shows that in RT6, when the payout exceeds the specified number, the process proceeds to RT7. The specified number is 300 when winning BB1 and moving to RT6, and 200 when winning BB2 and moving to RT6.

In the first embodiment, RT6 ends when a specified number of payouts is executed, but for example, it may end when a predetermined winning combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) is won, or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) is played.

《RT7 (RT after bonus)》
RT7 has a higher probability of winning a replay role than RT0 and RT1, and is an RT more advantageous than RT0 and RT1.

There are condition device numbers 1 to 17 and 25 to 32 in RT7 for internally elected hands.

FIG. 10 shows that when RT7 is set and the bell is dropped, the game shifts to RT1, when 15 games are completed, the game shifts to RT0, when RB wins, the game shifts to RT4, and when BB1 or BB2 wins, the game shifts to RT6. Also, it is shown that when the game in which the RB is internally won is not won, the process proceeds to RT3, and when the game in which the BB1 or BB2 is internally won is not won, the process proceeds to RT5.

<<State A and State B>>
In the slot machine 100 of the first embodiment, the game state is divided into state A and state B and managed separately from the above-described RT. Of these states, in state B, notification of the stop operation order for the internally won combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation navigation) is allowed, and in state A, this operation navigation is not displayed. However, in state B, when the push order replay or the push order bell is internally won, the operation navigation is not necessarily displayed, and the operation navigation may not be displayed depending on the conditions.

In the first embodiment, a lottery (see FIG. 17) to transition to state B is executed based on the hand that is internally won, and as a result, state B is set in the later-described omen, CZ (chance zone), AR preparation state, and AR (assist replay). The state B ends when these periods end, but if the operation navigation of the pressing order bell is not performed in the state B, the state B is continued until the operation navigation of the pressing order bell is performed. In addition, in order to prevent the gambling spirit from being stirred up by the state B continuing for a long time, the state A is set when the state B continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games).

It should be noted that state B may also occur during bonus winning and bonus operation (RT3-6) partly (for example, when the number of AR rights is held). However, since the push order replay and the push order bell are not internally won during the bonus operation, and the operation navigation is not displayed, the state A may be set during the bonus operation. Further, without being limited to the above configuration, it is also possible to configure so that the push order replay or the push order bell is internally won during the bonus operation, and the operation navigation is displayed.

In the first embodiment, the state B flag is used to distinguish between these states, and state A is indicated when the state B flag is off, and state B is indicated when the state B flag is on.

《AR state》
Next, the AR state will be explained. Below, the AR state may simply be referred to as AR.

In AR, when an internal lottery is won for the push order replay and the push order bell (condition device numbers 19 to 24, 29 to 31), an operation navigation showing the correct push order corresponding to each is displayed. However, during the period from when the AR is set until the transition to RT2 (the AR preparation flag is turned on), when winning a promotion replay (when the operation condition numbers 19 to 21 are internally won), the operation navigation indicating the pressing order of the correct answer is displayed, and even if the pressing order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31) is internally won, the operation navigation is not displayed. In the following description, the period from when this AR is set until it temporarily shifts to RT2 may be referred to as an AR preparation state. In addition, in RT0 or RT7, even if the press order bell (condition device number 29 to 31) is internally won, the operation navigation is not displayed. Note that this operation navigation is not limited to indicating the pressing order, and may indicate the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for ...!", or may indicate both the pressing order and the timing. In the following description, operation navigation for the pressing order of the bell may be referred to as bell operation navigation.

In the slot machine 100 of the first embodiment, a lottery for AR is performed in the lottery when transitioning from state A to state B, and if the lottery is won, the number of AR rights is added. If the number of AR rights is not 0, AR starts after a sign or CZ. Also, even if the AR lottery is not won at the time of transition to state B, the number of AR rights may be added until the end of the sign or CZ, and in this case as well, AR starts after the sign or CZ. If the number of AR rights is not 0 at the end of the omen or CZ (the number of remaining omen games is 0), the number of AR rights is decremented by 1, the number of AR remaining games is set to a predetermined number of games (for example, 50), and AR starts (step S1409 in FIG. 20).

In the first embodiment, the number of remaining AR games is subtracted as the game progresses. However, in the AR preparation state, the number of AR remaining games is not subtracted. Then, when the number of AR remaining games becomes 0, if the number of AR rights is greater than 0, the number of AR remaining games is set to a predetermined value (for example, 50) again, and if the number of AR rights is 0, the state B is shifted to the state A (parameters related to the state B are initialized), and the AR is terminated. Note that when the bonus is activated (RT4, RT6) in the middle of AR, subtraction of the number of AR remaining games is stopped, and the subtraction is resumed when RT7 is reached.

It should be noted that AR may be started and ended according to a predetermined condition (for example, when a specific game state is reached) without being limited to the configuration using the number of AR rights or the number of AR remaining games.

《Precursor state and CZ state》
Next, the precursor state and the CZ state will be described. Note that, hereinafter, the precursor state may be simply referred to as a precursor, and the CZ state may be simply referred to as CZ.

In Omen and CZ, when the press order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31) is internally won, a bell operation navigation showing the corresponding correct press order is displayed. However, in RT0 or RT7, this bell operation navigation is not displayed. Further, in the portent state, the bell operation navigation is not displayed until the operation navigation suppression game number set at the time of transition to the state B elapses. In addition, the number of times the bell-operated navigation is displayed through the omen and CZ is limited to a certain number (1 in the first embodiment), and the bell-operated navigation is configured not to be displayed beyond this number. Note that this bell operation navigation is not limited to indicating the pressing order, and may indicate the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for ...!", or may indicate both the pressing order and timing. Further, although the omen and CZ employ a configuration in which the operation navigation of the push order replay is not displayed, it may be configured to display this operation navigation as well.

In the first embodiment, when the lottery for transition to state B (see FIG. 17) is won, an omen starts from the next game. This predictive period is set at the time of lottery for transition to state B (see FIG. 14(b)). In addition, a lottery for the number of CZ games is performed at the time of the lottery for transition to state B, and if the lottery is won, CZ starts after the sign. If there are AR entitlement numbers at the end of these precursors and CZ, AR starts.

In Omen and CZ, an AR lottery may be conducted according to the internally won combination (step S1205 in FIG. 18). In this lottery, the same FIG. After state B, the AR lottery will not be won unless the state is shifted to state B, so the actual probability of acquiring the number of AR rights is lower than the probability shown in FIG. 14(a). However, in omen and CZ, the number of AR rights is added with the probability shown in FIG. Furthermore, an AR lottery (FIG. 14(c)) is separately executed for the CZs that are added because the operation navigation is not displayed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, if the lottery for the number of CZ games is not won in the lottery at the time of transition to state B and the bell operation navigation is not displayed by the end of the sign, the number of CZ games may be obtained and the CZ may be started (Fig. 23). Furthermore, in this case, a lottery for the number of AR rights is also executed, and the number of AR rights may be added.

Furthermore, when the bell operation navigation is not displayed through the omen and CZ, the number of AR rights is obtained (step S1619 in FIG. 22).

《Overview of processing》
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<<Main processing of main control unit>>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt is disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables (including the MY counter described later) to be stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the WDT 314 is permitted to operate, and the initial value is set.

In step S103, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132), and the winning line display lamp 120 is lit according to the medals inserted. Also, when medals have been inserted, preparations are made for transmission of an insert command indicating this. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it is checked whether or not a start lever 135 is operated while the specified number of medals are used, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the number of inserted medals and an effective winning line are determined, and the game is started.

In step S105, a winning combination lottery table stored in a ROM 306 is read according to the current RT, and an internal lottery (lottery for a combination) is performed using this and a random number obtained from a random number generation circuit 316 to determine an internal winning combination. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

At step S109, state processing at the time of game start is executed. Here, based on the results of the internal lottery, processing is performed to determine whether or not to display state B setting, omen, chance zone (hereinafter referred to as CZ), AR lottery, and operation navigation. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S111, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is activated. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in the first embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S113, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding commands (first to third press commands) to the first sub-controller 400, and every time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding commands (first to third stop commands) are prepared to be sent to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S115.

In step S115, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that Bell (small winning combination 23) has won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S117, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the awarded number is displayed using the payout number indicator 127.例文帳に追加

In step S119, RT update processing is performed. In this process, RT is transitioned based on the conditions shown in the state transition diagram shown in FIG.

In step S121, game state update processing is performed. Here, based on the result of the game, the start preparation and end processing of the state B, and the update of the status regarding the state B are performed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

Next, the details of the game start state processing (step S109) in the main control unit main processing of FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the game start state process (step S109) in FIG.

First, in step S1001 executed first, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is off. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1003; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1003, state B transition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1007. The details of this state B transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1005, state B-related processing at game start is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1007. The details of this state B transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1007, preparations are made to transmit the internal winning command to the first sub-controller 400, and the game start state processing is terminated. This internal winning command includes the condition device number of the internally won combination, state B, bonus, portent, CZ, information on AR (for example, state B flag, portent flag, CZ flag, operation navigation suppression flag, AR preparation flag, AR flag, number of AR rights and number of AR remaining games, END1 flag, END2 flag, MY counter), the presence or absence of instruction information and its contents, and the like.

Next, details of the state B transition processing (step S1003) in the game start state processing of FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the state B transition processing (step S1003) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, a lottery is made as to whether or not to shift to state B. In the first embodiment, the lottery type, which is identification information when lottery is performed using each table shown in FIG. 14, is attached to some condition device numbers (see lottery type column in FIGS. 8 and 9). In this process, the lottery type corresponding to the internally won combination is referred to, and a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to transition to state B using the table shown in FIG. More specifically, condition device numbers 1, 2, 4, 7 to 11, 13 to 16 refer to lottery type A and shift to state B with 100% probability, condition device numbers 5, 6, 33, and 34 refer to lottery type B and shift to state B with 100% probability, condition device numbers 25 and 27 refer to lottery type C and shift to state B with 100% probability, and condition device numbers 26 and 28 draw lots. Type D is referred to and shifts to state B with a probability of 50%. For condition device numbers other than the above, it does not shift to state B (lottery type is not assigned). It should be noted that the allocation of lottery types in FIGS. 8 and 9 is an example, and is not limited to this. For example, condition device number 26 (weak cherry) and condition device number 28 (watermelon) have different winning probabilities between RT3 and RT5 and RT0 to RT2 and RT7, so if there is a problem with the rules, lottery for state B transition may not be performed for these condition device numbers. Also, the lottery for transition to state B may be performed when a condition device (for example, condition device numbers 3 and 12) with a setting difference (the probability of winning differs depending on the setting) is won. Also, when winning a condition device with no setting difference, the winning probability to state B may be changed according to the setting value at that time.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S1101 has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1105; otherwise, this state B transition processing ends.

In step S1105, the number of games that can be continued in state B is set. Here, the number of games in which state B can be continued is a value that determines the number of games in which state B can be continued, and is configured so that the number of games in state B does not exceed the value set here. In the first embodiment, this value is set to 1500, but it may be another constant, or may be determined by lottery from a plurality of values, not limited to a constant.

In step S1107, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to acquire the AR right, and the process proceeds to step S1109. Here, the same lottery type as the lottery type referred to in step S1101 is referenced, and a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to acquire the AR right using FIG. 14(a) (see FIG. 14(a) AR winning probability). Specifically, in the lottery type A, the AR right (the number of AR rights is 1) is obtained with a probability of 20%, in the lottery type B, the AR right (the number of AR rights is 3) is obtained with a probability of 100%, in the lottery type C, the AR right (the number of AR rights is 1) is obtained with a probability of 10%, and in the lottery type D, the AR right (the number of AR rights is 1) is obtained with a probability of 5%. When AR rights are acquired, the number of AR rights is added according to the acquired value. Note that the number of AR rights to be acquired may be varied according to the set value.

In step S1109, lottery for the number of CZ games is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1111. Here, the same lottery type as the lottery type referred to in step S1101 is referred to, and lottery for the number of CZ games is executed using FIG. 14(a) (see FIG. 14(a) CZ winning probability). Specifically, the number of CZ games is set to 3 with a probability of 100% in the lottery type A, a probability of 0% in the lottery type B, a probability of 70% in the lottery type C, and a probability of 50% in the lottery type D. Note that the value is not limited to this value and may be another constant, and may be determined by lottery from a plurality of values without being limited to the constant.

In step S1111, lottery for the number of precursor games is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1111. Here, the same lottery type as the lottery type referred to in step S1101 is referred to, and a lottery for the number of precursor games is executed using the table of FIG. 14(b) (see FIG. 14(b)). Specifically, 6 to 20 premonitory games are won for each lottery type. It should be noted that the number of precursor games may be configured to be set to a constant.

In step S1113, the value of the number of precursor games won in step S1111 is set as the number of remaining precursor games.

In step S1115, the number of operation navigation suppression games is set. In the first embodiment, the number of operation navigation restraint games of 3 to 6 is set by lottery. However, in the bonus internal winning, 6 is set as the number of operation navigation suppression games. In addition, when the bonus is internally won, the operation navigation suppression period may be set until the bonus is won. Further, for example, the sum of the number of CZ games and the number of precursory games may be set as the number of operation-navigation suppression games, or the maximum value of the number of precursory games may be set as the number of operation-navigation suppression games. Thus, the number of operation navigation suppression games is not limited to a constant, and may be other than a constant. Also, the number of operation navigation suppression games may be set using the number of CZ games or the number of precursor games. Further, when a battle effect or a continuous effect by the effect image display device 157 or the like is planned, the number of operation navigation suppression games may be set according to the number of games of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, details of the game start state B related processing (step S1005) in the game start state processing of FIG. 16 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the state B-related processing (step S1005) at the start of the game in FIG.

First, in step S1201 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1203; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1211.

In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the internally won combination is the target of the AR right lottery. In the first embodiment, when there is a lottery type corresponding to the internal winning combination (one of A to D is described in the lottery type column in FIGS. 8 and 9), the internal winning combination is subject to the AR right lottery. On the other hand, if there is no lottery type corresponding to the internal winning combination (“-” is described in the lottery type column in FIGS. 8 and 9), the internal winning combination is not subject to the AR right lottery. If the internally won combination is the target of the AR right lottery, the process proceeds to step S1205; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1219.

In step S1205, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to acquire the AR right, and the process proceeds to step S1219. Here, the lottery type associated with the internal winning combination is referred to, and a lottery to determine whether or not to acquire the AR right is executed using FIG. 14(a) (see FIG. 14(a) AR winning probability). Specifically, in the lottery type A, the AR right (the number of AR rights is 1) is obtained with a probability of 20%, in the lottery type B, the AR right (the number of AR rights is 3) is obtained with a probability of 100%, in the lottery type C, the AR right (the number of AR rights is 1) is obtained with a probability of 10%, and in the lottery type D, the AR right (the number of AR rights is 1) is obtained with a probability of 5%. When AR rights are acquired, the number of AR rights is added according to the acquired value.

In step S1211, it is determined whether the AR flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1213; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1217.

In step S1213, 1 is subtracted from the AR remaining game number if it is not 0 except during bonus operation (RT4, RT6). Also, the number of AR remaining games may be added (added) based on the internal winning combination. After this process, the process advances to step S1215.

In step S1215, the number of operation navigation suppression games is set by lottery according to the internally won combination, and the process proceeds to step S1219.

In step S1217, processing is performed when the state is B and not during a sign (including CZ) or during AR, and the process proceeds to step S1219.

In step S1219, an instruction information setting process is executed, and the game start state B related process is ended. This instruction information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the details of the instruction information setting process (step S1219) in the game start state B related process of FIG. 18 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the instruction information setting process (step S1219) in FIG.

First, in step S1301 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not it is either RT4 or RT6 (the bonus is being activated). If this condition is satisfied, the instruction information setting process is terminated; otherwise, the process advances to step S1303.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1305; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1321.

In step S1305, it is determined whether it is RT0 or RT7. If this condition is satisfied, the instruction information setting process is terminated; otherwise, the process advances to step S1307.

In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the push order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31) is internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1309; otherwise, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1309, it is determined whether or not the operation navigation suppression flag is off. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1311; otherwise, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1311, it is determined whether or not the operation navigation guarantee flag is off. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1313; otherwise, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1313, the correct bell pressing order is set in the instruction information, and the instruction information setting process is terminated.

In step S1321, indication information is set for a period excluding a sign and CZ. For example, if any one of the AR flag, END1 flag, and END2 flag is ON, and the conditions device numbers 19 to 24 and 29 to 31 are internally won, the pressing order of the correct answer is set in the instruction information. Note that even if the push order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31) is internally won, if RT0 or RT7 and if the operation navigation suppression flag is ON, nothing is set in the instruction information (the operation navigation of the push order bell is not displayed). When the AR preparation flag is on, the order of pressing the correct answer is set in the instruction information when the operation condition numbers 19 to 21 are internally won.

Next, details of the game state update process (step S121) in the main control unit main process of FIG. 15 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the game state update process (step S121) in FIG.

First, in step S1401 executed first, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1403; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1421.

In step S1403, operation navigation assurance flag setting processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1405, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1407; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1409.

In step S1407, precursor and CZ processing are executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1409, AR update processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the bonus is in operation (RT4 or RT6) when the start lever 135 is operated. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1417; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1413.

In step S1413, it is determined whether or not the bonus is in operation (RT4 or RT6). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1415; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1423.

In step S1415, various processes for bonus activation in state B are executed, and the process proceeds to step S1423. For example, the number of remaining omen games and the number of operation navigation suppression games are initialized to 0, and the CZ flag is set to off.

In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the bonus is in operation (RT4 or RT6). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1423; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1419.

In step S1419, various processes at the end of the bonus in state B are executed, and the process proceeds to step S1423.

In step S1421, if the number of games that can be continued in state B is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S1411; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1423.

In step S1423, state B update processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1425, the instruction information is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1427.

In step S1427, preparations are made to send a game state update command. This command includes information on RT, state B, bonus, omen, CZ, and information on AR (for example, state B flag, omen flag, CZ flag, operation navigation suppression flag, AR preparation flag, AR flag, AR right number and AR remaining game number, END1 flag, END2 flag, MY counter).

Next, using FIG. 21, details of the operation navigation guarantee flag setting process (step S1403) in the game state update process of FIG. 20 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the operation navigation assurance flag setting process (step S1403) in FIG.

First, in step S1501 executed first, it is determined whether or not the operation navigation assurance flag is off. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1503; otherwise, the operation navigation guarantee flag setting process is terminated.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the bonus is in operation (RT4 or RT6). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1509; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1505.

In step S1505, it is determined whether or not instruction information is set. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1507; otherwise, the operation navigation assurance flag setting process is terminated.

In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the push order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31) is internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1509; otherwise, the operation navigation guarantee flag setting process is terminated.

In step S1509, the operation navigation guarantee flag is set to ON, and this operation navigation guarantee flag setting process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 22, the details of the precursor and CZ process (step S1407) in the game state update process of FIG. 20 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the precursor and CZ process (step S1407) in FIG.

First, in step S1601 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining precursor games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1603; otherwise, this precursor and during CZ processing is terminated.

In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the operation navigation assurance flag is off. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1605; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1607.

In step S1605, CZ addition determination processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1607, it is determined whether or not the number of CZ games is greater than zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1609; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1615.

In step S1609, the CZ flag is set to ON.

In step S1611, the value of the number of CZ games is set to the number of remaining precursor games.

In step S1613, the value of the number of CZ games is initialized (cleared to 0).

In step S1615, the CZ flag is set off.

In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the operation navigation assurance flag is off. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1618; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1621.

In step S1618, it is determined whether there is no AR right (the number of AR rights is 0). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1619; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1621.

In step S1619, 1 is added to the number of AR rights.

In step S1621, it is determined whether or not there is an AR right (the number of AR rights is greater than 0). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1623; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1625.

In step S1623, AR preparation processing is executed. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the number of AR rights, the AR preparation flag is set to ON, and an initial value (for example, 50) is added to the number of AR remaining games. Note that this processing is not executed during bonus operation and bonus winning (RT3 to RT6). Also, the value to be added as the number of AR remaining games is not limited to a constant, and may be determined by lottery.

In step S1625, the state B end waiting flag is set to ON, and this precursor and CZ process is ended.

Next, the details of the CZ addition determination process (step S1605) in the precursor and CZ process in FIG. 22 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the CZ addition determination process (step S1605) in FIG.

First, in step S1701, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the bonus is internally won (if the bonus is internally won in the game, RT3 or RT5). If this condition is satisfied, this CZ addition determination process is terminated; otherwise, the process advances to step S1703.

In step S1703, it is determined whether or not there is no AR right (the number of AR rights is 0). If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1705; otherwise, the CZ addition determination process ends.

In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the number of CZ games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1707; otherwise, this CZ addition determination process ends.

In step S1707, it is determined whether the CZ flag is off. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1709; otherwise, this CZ addition determination process ends.

In step S1709, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to acquire the AR right, and the process proceeds to step S1711. Here, the same lottery type as the lottery type referred to in step S1101 at the time of transition to state B is referred to, and the AR right lottery is executed using FIG. 14(c). When AR rights are acquired, the number of AR rights is added according to the acquired value. Since the lottery types that may be referred to in this process are only C and D, lottery types A and B have no lottery probabilities.

At step S1711, 3 is set to the number of CZ games. Note that the value is not limited to this value and may be another constant, and may be determined by lottery from a plurality of values without being limited to the constant.

Next, details of the AR state update process (step S1409) in the game state update process of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the AR status update process (step S1409) in FIG.

First, in step S1801 executed first, it is determined whether or not the AR preparation flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1803; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1811.

In step S1803, AR ready state processing is executed. Specifically, the AR preparation flag is set to OFF and the AR flag is set to ON on the condition that the state has shifted to the replay high probability state (RT2), and this AR state update process is terminated.

In step S1811, it is determined whether the AR flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1813; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1821.

In step S1813, processing during AR is executed. Specifically, when the number of AR remaining games is 0 and the AR rights remain (the number of AR rights is greater than 0), if the bonus is not in the winning state or the bonus is not in operation (other than RT3 to RT6), 1 is subtracted from the number of AR rights and 50 is added to the number of AR remaining games. The value to be added as the number of remaining AR games is not limited to a constant, and may be determined by lottery. Also, when both the number of AR remaining games and the number of AR rights are 0, the state B end waiting flag is set to ON. After these processes, this AR status update process ends.

In step S1821, processing other than the above is executed, and this AR state update processing ends.

Next, details of the state B update process (step S1423) in the game state update process of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the state B update process (step S1423) in FIG.

First, in step S1901 executed first, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1903; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1921.

In step S1903, MY counter update processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1905. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the number of games that can be continued in state B is greater than zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1907; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1919.

In step S1907, it is determined whether or not the state B completion waiting flag is ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1909; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1911.

In step S1909, it is determined whether or not the operation navigation assurance flag is ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1919; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1911.

In step S1911, the number of games that can be continued in state B is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1931.

In step S1913, it is determined whether the number of games that can be continued in state B is 20 or not. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1915; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1931.

In step S1915, the END1 flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1917.

In step S1917, the AR flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1931.

In step S1919, flags and variables for state B are initialized. A transition from state B to state A is performed by this process. In this process, the state B flag, the precursor flag, the CZ flag, the AR preparation flag, the AR flag, the operation navigation guarantee flag, the operation navigation suppression flag, the state B end waiting flag, the END1 flag, and the END2 flag are set to OFF. Also, the number of state B continuable games, the number of remaining omen games, the number of CZ games, the number of AR rights, the number of AR remaining games, the number of operation navigation suppression games, and the values of the MY counter are initialized to 0, respectively.

In step S1921, it is determined whether or not the number of games that can be continued in state B is greater than zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1923; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1931.

In step S1923, the state B flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1931.

In step S1931, if the number of remaining precursor games is greater than 0, the precursor flag is set to ON, and 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining precursor games. On the other hand, if the number of remaining precursor games is 0, the precursor flag is set to OFF. After that, the process proceeds to step S1941.

In step S1941, when the operation navigation suppression game number is greater than 0, the operation navigation suppression flag is set to ON, and 1 is subtracted from the operation navigation suppression game number. On the other hand, if the number of operation-navigation suppression games is 0, the operation-navigation suppression flag is set to OFF. After that, the state B update process is terminated.

Next, details of the MY counter update process (step S1903) in the state B update process of FIG. 25 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the MY counter update process (step S1903) in FIG.

First, in step S1A01 executed first, it is determined whether or not the previous winning combination is a replay combination. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A11; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1A03.

In step S1A03, the value obtained by adding the number of payouts in the previous game to the value of the MY counter and subtracting the number of medals inserted is updated as the value of the MY counter. After that, the process proceeds to step S1A05.

In step S1A05, it is determined whether or not the value of the MY counter is negative. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A07; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1A11.

At step S1A07, the value of the MY counter is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1A11.

In step S1A11, it is determined whether or not the value of the MY counter is 2400 or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A19; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1A13.

In step S1A13, it is determined whether or not the END2 flag is set to OFF and the value of the MY counter is 2150 or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A15; otherwise, the MY counter update process is terminated.

At step S1A15, the END2 flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1A17.

At step S1A17, the AR flag is set to OFF, and this MY counter update process is terminated.

In step S1A19, the value of the number of games that can be continued in state B is set to 0, and this MY counter update process ends.

<<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in the first embodiment).

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is restarted periodically (in the first embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the first embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing).

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the signals are stored in the signal state storage areas provided separately for each sensor 318 in the RAM 308. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . In the first embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicates that data is set when it is on), bits 11 to 14 are command types (in the first embodiment, basic command, bet command, start lever reception command, internal winning command, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands accompanying reception of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel 1). 10 to 112 stop command, winning command, payout number command and payout completion command accompanying medal payout processing, game state update command), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control part 400, it is possible to determine the performance control according to the change of the game control in the main control part 300 according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, and to determine the performance control contents based on the information of the command data included in the output schedule information.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 .

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and when an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 336, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low-voltage signal is received (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low-voltage signal is not received (power supply shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information (recovery data) that needs to be saved, such as a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of the power failure, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, a checksum value for the predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that the power failure process has been performed is set to ON.

<<Processing of the first sub-controller 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 28A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 28(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 28(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed. The details of this command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command for shutter control in the performance data read in step S309, the shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 28(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 28(c). The first sub-control unit 400 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the first embodiment), and is triggered by this timer interrupt to execute timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 28A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

Next, details of the command processing (step S307) in the first sub-controller main processing of FIG. 28(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 28(d). This figure is a flowchart of the command processing (step S307) in FIG. 28(a).

First, in step S341 executed first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S343; otherwise, the command processing ends.

In step S343, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from main control unit 300, is executed. Among these processes, the process when an internal winning command is received will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, processing when a game state update command is received will be described later using FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, details of internal winning command processing (step S343) when an internal winning command is received in the command processing of FIG. 28(d) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart of internal winning command processing (step S343) when an internal winning command is received in FIG. 28(d).

First, in step S3001 executed first, the condition device number of the internal winning combination is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, information about state B is obtained from the information included in the internal winning command, and the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3005, the presence or absence of instruction information is determined from the information included in the internal winning command. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3007; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3009.

At step S3007, effect data for executing operation navigation is set based on the condition device number and instruction information.

In step S3009, in addition to the above-described processing, processing upon reception of an internal winning command is executed, and this internal winning command processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, details of the game state update command process (step S343) when the game state update command is received in the command process of FIG. 28(d) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the game state update command process (step S343) when the game state update command is received in FIG. 28(d).

First, in step S3101 executed first, information on RT and state B is acquired from the information included in the game state update command, and the process proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, the information acquired in step S3101 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the portent state will start from the next game (the portent flag is turned on). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3105; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3105, the corresponding effect data and its execution timing are set so that the effect corresponding to the precursor state is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game.

In step S3107, the information acquired in step S3101 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not CZ starts from the next game (the CZ flag is turned on). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3109; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3111.

In step S3109, the corresponding effect data and its execution timing are set so that the effect corresponding to CZ is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game.

In step S3111, the information obtained in step S3101 is referred to, and AR (including the AR preparation state) starts from the next game (any of RT0 to 2, 7, the state B flag is ON, and the portent flag is changed from ON to OFF) or not. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3113; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3115.

In step S3113, the relevant effect data and its execution timing are set so that the effect corresponding to AR (including the AR ready state) is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game.

In step S3115, it is determined whether or not the END effect (one of END1 effect and END2 effect) has been set. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3119; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3117.

In step S3117, END effect setting processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3119, END effect update processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3121, in addition to the processing described above, processing upon reception of the game state update command is executed, and the game state update command processing is terminated.

Next, details of the END effect setting process (step S3117) in the game state update command process of FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the END effect setting process (step S3117) in FIG.

First, in step S3201 executed first, it is determined whether or not the END1 flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3203; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3203, END1 effect is set, and this END effect setting process is terminated.

In step S3211, it is determined whether or not the END2 flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3213; otherwise, the END effect setting process is terminated.

In step S3213, END2 effect is set, and this END effect setting process is terminated.

Next, details of the END effect update process (step S3119) in the game state update command process of FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the END effect update process (step S3119) in FIG.

First, in step S3301 executed first, it is determined whether or not the END1 effect is being executed. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3303; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3303, the number of games that can be continued in state B is obtained, and the process proceeds to step S3305.

In step S3305, it is determined whether or not a condition for switching the scene of the END1 effect (hereinafter referred to as an END1 effect switching condition) has been established. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3307; otherwise, the END effect update process is terminated. In the first embodiment, the END1 effect switching condition is that each scene is executed for two games, and it is determined whether or not the END1 effect switching condition is satisfied by referring to the value of the number of games that can be continued in state B obtained in step S3303 described above. Note that the END1 effect switching condition is not limited to this condition, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

In step S3307, a process for switching the currently executed scene to the next scene in the END1 effect is executed, and the END effect update process ends.

In step S3311, it is determined whether or not the END2 effect is being executed. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3313; otherwise, the END effect update process is terminated.

In step S3313, the value of the MY counter is obtained, and the process proceeds to step S3315.

In step S3315, it is determined whether or not a condition for switching the scene of the END2 effect (hereinafter referred to as an END2 effect switching condition) has been established. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3317; otherwise, the END effect update process is terminated. The END2 effect switching condition will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG.

In step S3317, a process for switching the currently executed scene to the next scene in the END2 effect is executed, and the END effect update process is terminated.

<<Processing of the second sub-controller 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 33(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 33(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 33(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 33(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the performance data read out in step S409, the image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 33(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 33(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the first embodiment), and is triggered by this timer interrupt to execute timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 33(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 33(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets an instruction to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425, otherwise, it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 of image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) forming the display image. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431, otherwise, it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Description of operation>>
The features of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below using an operation example. In the following figures, in the item "number of games", the period from the start operation of the game (operation of the start lever 135) to the start operation of the next game is shown as one game period.

[Example of operation when condition device numbers 2 and 25 are won]
[Example of operation (A1): When internally elected for a double role with a bonus]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the operation in the case of internally winning a double combination with a bonus and shifting to state B (an omen is confirmed at the time of shifting to state B). In this example, assume that the initial states are RT1 and state A (state B flag off). In this state A, operation navigation is not displayed (Yes determination in step S1001 of FIG. 16, FIGS. 18 and 19 are not executed). In the first game of FIG. 34, in addition to being in RT1 and state A, it is indicated that state A is a period during which operation navigation is not displayed (operation navigation unavailable period). As for the effect at this time, a normal effect is executed (see FIG. 43(a)).

In this state, it is assumed that an internal win is made at BB1+chance (condition device number 2) in the start operation of the second game. In this case, in the state B transition lottery (step S1101 in FIG. 17), the state B transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% (FIG. 14(a), lottery type A).

When the status B transition lottery is won, the number of games that can be continued in state B is first set, and then the AR right acquisition lottery, CZ game number lottery, and precursor game number lottery (steps S1105, S1107, S1109, and S1111 in FIG. 17) are executed. In this example, it is assumed that the AR right acquisition lottery was not won, and the number of CZ games of 3 games and the number of premonition games of 6 games were obtained. Also, 6 is set as the number of operation navigation suppression games (step S1115 in FIG. 17).

After that, the game progresses and when the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, after processing such as medal payout, the RT update processing (step S119 in FIG. 15) shifts from RT1 to RT5. In the subsequent game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15), in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20), the state B flag, the portent flag, and the operation navigation suppression flag are set to ON from the results of the state B transition lottery and the like described above (steps S1923, S1931, and S1941 in FIG. 25). As a result, the state B, the sign, and the control navigation suppression period start from the next game (the third game). Also, after receiving the game state update command after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400 performs Battle! is executed (see FIG. 43(d)). Furthermore, the effect data is set so as to start the battle effect (see FIG. 43(g)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (third game). FIG. 34 shows that the state B, the sign, the control navigation restraint period, and the battle effect start from the third game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the fifth game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won. However, in the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression period is still continuing, and during this operation navigation suppression period, even if the push order bell (condition device number 29 to 31) is internally won, the operation navigation is not displayed (No determination in step S1309 in FIG. 19, No determination in step S3005 in FIG. 29). FIG. 34 shows that, in the fifth game, the pressing order bell (condition device number 31) was internally won, but the operation navigation is not displayed because it is the operation navigation suppression period.

Also, in the fifth game, a judgment effect is set by the start operation of the start lever 135 (step S3009 in FIG. 29). This judge effect is to notify whether or not an AR or a bonus has been won. Here, at the timing of the third stop, it is announced that the bonus is fixed (FIG. 43(h)).

Furthermore, in the sixth game, the starting operation of the start lever 135 executes a confirmation notice to display the symbol of the internally won bonus (FIG. 43(m)). In response to this, it is assumed that the symbol of the special combination 1 is stopped on the pay line L1 in the sixth game (FIG. 43(t)). As a result, the RT update process (step S119 in FIG. 15) shifts from RT5 to RT6 (RT6 from the next game).

In the operation navigation guarantee flag setting process (step S1403 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the sixth game, the operation navigation guarantee flag is set to ON by the operation of the bonus (step S1509 in FIG. 21).

Furthermore, in the sign and CZ process (step S1407 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the sixth game, since the number of remaining sign games is not 0, nothing changes (No determination in step S1601 in FIG. 22).

When the sign and CZ processing are completed and the game state update processing is returned to, the number of remaining sign games and the number of operation navigation suppression games are initialized to 0 due to the activation of the bonus, and the CZ flag is set to OFF (step S1415 in FIG. 20). Furthermore, in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) that is subsequently executed in the gaming state update process for the sixth game, since the number of remaining precursor games and the number of operation navigation suppression games are 0, the precursor flag and the operation navigation suppression flag are set to OFF (steps S1931 and S1941 in FIG. 25). By the above processing, the predictor and operation navigation suppression period scheduled for the next game (seventh game) and thereafter are cancelled. In addition, neither CZ, which is set at the end of the omen, nor the navigation period 1 after the operation navigation suppression period is set. In FIG. 34, these periods are indicated by left-sloping hatching.

Furthermore, the effect data is set so that the bonus effect is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (seventh game) by the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes. FIG. 34 shows that the bonus effect starts from the 7th game.

If the AR right acquisition lottery (step S1107 in FIG. 17, step S1205 in FIG. 18) is won at the time of transition to state B and during the omen, and there is the number of AR rights, AR is started when the bonus period ends (step S1409 in FIG. 20).

[Operation example (A2): In the case of only precursors]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the state B transition lottery is won and the CZ and AR lotteries are not won (an omen is confirmed at the time of transition to state B). This operation example is different from FIG. 38 (operation example (B1)) only in the effect content. In this example, assume that the initial states are RT1 and state A (state B flag off). In this state A, operation navigation is not displayed (Yes determination in step S1001 of FIG. 16, FIGS. 18 and 19 are not executed). In the first game of FIG. 35, in addition to being RT1 and state A, it is indicated that state A is a period during which operation navigation is not displayed (operation navigation unavailable period). As for the effect at this time, a normal effect is executed (see FIG. 43(a)).

In this state, it is assumed that the second chance (condition device number 25) is internally won in the start operation of the second game. In this case, in the state B transition lottery (step S1101 in FIG. 17), the state B transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% (FIG. 14(a), lottery type C).

When the status B transition lottery is won, the number of games that can be continued in state B is first set, and then the AR right acquisition lottery, CZ game number lottery, and precursor game number lottery (steps S1105, S1107, S1109, and S1111 in FIG. 17) are executed. In this example, it is assumed that the AR right acquisition lottery and the CZ number-of-games lottery are not won. As for the number of predictive games, it is assumed that 6 predictive games are obtained, and 3 is set as the number of operation navigation suppression games (step S1115 in FIG. 17).

After that, the game progresses, and when the reels 110 to 112 stop, the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) is executed after the medal payout process. In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in this process, the state B flag, the precursor flag, and the operation navigation suppression flag are set to ON (steps S1923, S1931, and S1941 in FIG. 25) from the results of the state B transition lottery and the like described above. As a result, the state B, the sign, and the control navigation suppression period start from the next game (the third game). Also, after receiving the game state update command after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400 performs Battle! is executed (see FIG. 43(d)). Furthermore, the effect data is set so as to start the battle effect (see FIG. 43(g)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (third game). FIG. 35 shows that the state B, the sign, the control navigation restraint period, and the battle effect start from the third game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the fifth game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won. However, in the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression period is still continuing, and during this operation navigation suppression period, even if the push order bell (condition device number 29 to 31) is internally won, the operation navigation is not displayed (No determination in step S1309 in FIG. 19, No determination in step S3005 in FIG. 29). FIG. 35 shows that, in the fifth game, the pressing order bell (condition device number 31) was internally won, but the operation navigation is not displayed because it is the operation navigation suppression period.

Also, in the fifth game, a judgment effect is set by the start operation of the start lever 135 (step S3009 in FIG. 29). This judge effect is an effect to notify whether or not the AR or bonus has been won, but here, at the timing of the third stop, it is announced that the bonus has not been won (Fig. 43(i)).

In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression flag is set to OFF when the number of operation navigation suppression games becomes 0, and the operation navigation suppression period ends (step S1941 in FIG. 25). As a result, from the next game (sixth game), a period (operation navigation period 1) is started in which the operation navigation of the pressing order bell can be performed a certain number of times. Also, after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command sets the effect data so as to start the normal effect (see FIG. 43(a)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (sixth game). FIG. 35 shows that the operation navigation suppression period ends in the fifth game, and the operation navigation period 1 and the normal effect start in the sixth game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the 8th game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 30) is internally won. In the eighth game, since the operation navigation period 1 (the operation navigation suppression flag is off) and the operation navigation guarantee flag is off, the operation navigation indicating the order of pressing the correct answers is displayed (step S1313 in FIG. 19, step S3007 in FIG. 29, see FIG. 43(b)). FIG. 35 shows that in the 8th game, the push order bell (condition device number 30) is internally won, and the operation navigation (middle 1st) showing the correct push order is displayed.

In the operation navigation assurance flag setting process (step S1403 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the eighth game, the operation navigation assurance flag is set to ON as the operation navigation is displayed (step S1509 in FIG. 21).

Furthermore, in the sign and CZ processing (step S1407 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update processing of the eighth game, since the number of remaining predictive games is 0, the operation navigation guarantee flag is ON, the number of CZ games is 0, and the number of AR rights is 0, the state B end wait flag is set to ON (step S1625 in FIG. 22).

Furthermore, in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the eighth game, the parameters of state B are initialized (becomes state A) because the state B end wait flag is on and the operation navigation guarantee flag is on. In this process, the parameters of the sign, CZ, and AR are also initialized. As a result, the game returns to state A from the next game (9th game), and the sign and operation navigation period 1 ends. FIG. 35 shows that state B, precursor, operation navigation period 1 ends in the eighth game, and state A (operation navigation disabled period) starts in the ninth game.

In the first embodiment, the number of AR rights may be added by lottery during the omen (step S1205 in FIG. 18). Therefore, even if the number of AR rights is 0 at the time of transition to state B, the number of AR rights may be greater than 0 at the end of the sign. In the above example, if the number of AR rights is not 0 in the eighth game omen and during CZ processing (step S1407 in FIG. 20), the omen ends in the eighth game, and the AR starts in the ninth game. In this case, state B is maintained even after the ninth game. In addition, in the AR, the operation navigation of the push order bell and the push order replay is displayed (operation navigation period 2), and the AR effects are executed.

[Operation example (A3): When internally elected to a double role with a bonus during AR]
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the operation in the case of internally winning a double combination with a bonus during AR. For this example, assume the initial states are RT1 and AR (state B flag on, precursor flag off, CZ flag off). In the AR, this is the period during which the push order bell and the push order replay operation navigation are displayed (operation navigation period 2) (step S1321 in FIG. 19). The first game in FIG. 36 indicates RT1, state B, AR (operation navigation period 2). Also, as the effect at this time, an AR effect is executed.

In this state, it is assumed that an internal win is made at BB1+chance (condition device number 2) in the start operation of the second game. During AR, the number of operation navigation suppression games may be set by lottery according to the internally won combination (step S1215 in FIG. 18). Here, it is assumed that 6 is set as the number of operation navigation suppression games.

After that, the game progresses and when the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, after processing such as medal payout, the RT update processing (step S119 in FIG. 15) shifts from RT1 to RT5. In the subsequent game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15), the operation navigation suppression flag is set to ON in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) (step S1941 in FIG. 25). As a result, the operation navigation suppression period starts from the next game (third game). Also, after receiving the game state update command after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400 performs Battle! A production in which the characters are displayed is executed. Furthermore, the effect data is set so as to start the battle effect (see FIG. 43(g)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (third game). FIG. 36 shows that the control navigation restraint period and the battle effect start from the third game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the fifth game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won. However, in the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression period still continues, and during this operation navigation suppression period, even if an internal win is made for the pressing order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31), the operation navigation is not displayed (step S1321 in FIG. 19). FIG. 36 shows that, in the fifth game, the pressing order bell (condition device number 31) was internally won, but the operation navigation is not displayed because it is the operation navigation suppression period.

Also, in the fifth game, a judgment effect is set by the start operation of the start lever 135 (step S3009 in FIG. 29). This judge effect is to notify whether or not an AR or a bonus has been won. Here, at the timing of the third stop, it is announced that the bonus is fixed (FIG. 43(h)).

Furthermore, in the sixth game, the starting operation of the start lever 135 executes a confirmation notice to display the symbol of the internally won bonus (FIG. 43(m)). In response to this, it is assumed that the symbol of the special combination 1 is stopped on the pay line L1 in the sixth game (FIG. 43(t)). As a result, the RT update process (step S119 in FIG. 15) shifts from RT5 to RT6 (RT6 from the next game).

Furthermore, due to the activation of the bonus, the number of operation navigation suppression games is initialized to 0 (step S1415 in FIG. 20), and the operation navigation suppression flag is set to OFF in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) (step S1941 in FIG. 25). By the above processing, the operation navigation suppression period scheduled for the next game (seventh game) and thereafter is cancelled. In FIG. 36, this canceled period is indicated by hatching sloping to the left.

Furthermore, the effect data is set so that the bonus effect is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (seventh game) by the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes. FIG. 36 shows that the bonus effect starts from the 7th game.

When the bonus period ends, the AR starts (step S1409 in FIG. 20).

[Operation example (A4): When operation navigation suppression period is set during AR]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the operation navigation suppression period is set during AR. For this example, assume the initial states are RT1 and AR (state B flag on, precursor flag off, CZ flag off). In the AR, the operation navigation of the push order bell and the push order replay is displayed (operation navigation period 2) (step S1321 in FIG. 19). The first game in FIG. 37 indicates RT1, state B, AR (operation navigation period 2). Also, as the effect at this time, an AR effect is executed.

In this state, it is assumed that the second chance (condition device number 25) is internally won in the start operation of the second game. During AR, the number of operation navigation suppression games may be set by lottery according to the internally won combination (step S1215 in FIG. 18). Here, it is assumed that 6 is set as the number of operation navigation suppression games.

After that, the game progresses, and when the reels 110 to 112 stop, the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) is executed after the medal payout process. In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in this process, the operation navigation suppression flag is set to ON (step S1941 in FIG. 25). As a result, the operation navigation suppression period starts from the next game (third game). Also, after receiving the game state update command after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400 performs Battle! A production in which the characters are displayed is executed. Furthermore, the effect data is set so as to start the battle effect (see FIG. 43(g)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (third game). FIG. 37 shows that the control navigation restraint period and the battle effect start from the third game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the fifth game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won. However, in the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression period still continues, and during this operation navigation suppression period, even if an internal win is made for the pressing order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31), the operation navigation is not displayed (step S1321 in FIG. 19). FIG. 37 shows that, in the fifth game, the pushing order bell (condition device number 31) was internally won, but the operation navigation is not displayed because it is the operation navigation suppression period.

Also, in the fifth game, a judgment effect is set by the start operation of the start lever 135 (step S3009 in FIG. 29). This judge effect is an effect to notify whether or not the AR or bonus has been won, but here, at the timing of the third stop, it is announced that the bonus has not been won (Fig. 43(i)).

In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression flag is set to OFF when the number of operation navigation suppression games becomes 0, and the operation navigation suppression period ends (step S1941 in FIG. 25). As a result, the push order replay and the push order bell operation navigation are displayed again from the next game (sixth game). Also, after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the game state update command sets the effect data so that the AR effect is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (sixth game). FIG. 37 shows that the control navigation suppression period ends in the fifth game, and the control navigation period 2 and the AR effect start in the sixth game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the 8th game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 30) is internally won. In the eighth game, since it is operation navigation period 2 (the operation navigation suppression flag is off), operation navigation indicating the pressing order of correct answers is displayed (step S1321 in FIG. 19). FIG. 37 shows that the push order bell (condition device number 30) is internally won in the eighth game, and the operation navigation (middle 1st) showing the correct push order is displayed.

It should be noted that when the number of AR rights and the number of AR remaining games become 0, AR is terminated and state A is set (step S1409 in FIG. 20, step S1919 in FIG. 25).

[Operation examples (A1) to (A4)]
In the slot machine 100 of the first embodiment, RT4 and RT6 are provided as states advantageous to the player. When shifting to RT4 or RT6, RT3 or RT5 may be passed as a pre-stage, and in the first embodiment, a sign or CZ may be set in this pre-stage (for example, operation example (A1) in FIG. 34). On the other hand, even when the game does not move to RT4 or RT6 (when the game is internally elected to a conditional device that does not include a special combination), there are cases where a sign or CZ is set (for example, an operation example (A2) in FIG. 35). In these signs and CZ, at least the operation navigation suppression period is set.

Also, in RT3 or RT5 during AR, there is a case where an indication or CZ is not provided, but an operation navigation suppression period is provided (for example, operation example (A3) in FIG. 36). On the other hand, when the game does not move to RT4 or RT6 during AR (when the conditional device that does not include a special role is internally elected), the operation navigation suppression period may be set (for example, the operation example (A4) in FIG. 37).

That is, in both cases of internal winning (RT3 or RT5) and non-internal winning of the bonus, common actions (including not only positive actions (doing) but also negative actions (not doing)) can occur. Players who see this common action expect the start of RT4 or RT6, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Due to these effects, the period during which the above-described common operation can occur is the predictive period for the start of RT4 or RT6 (hereinafter referred to as bonus predictive period).

During the bonus sign period, even if the number of medals decreases, the player has no choice but to accept the decrease until the result is determined. For this reason, for example, it is conceivable to suppress the decrease in medals during the bonus prediction period by displaying the operation navigation when internally winning the push-order bell during the bonus prediction period. However, in the bonus sign period, there are cases where various effects are performed in order to make the player expect to shift to RT4 or RT6. If the operation navigation is displayed during such an effect, it becomes difficult to grasp the effect, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced.

In the first embodiment, a configuration including an operation navigation suppression period and an operation navigation period 1 (operation navigation period 2 during AR) is adopted in the bonus indication period (for example, operation examples (A1) to (A4) in FIGS. 34 to 37). Since the operation navigation is not displayed during the operation navigation suppression period, it is possible to easily comprehend the effect for enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, during operation navigation period 1 (operation navigation period 2 during AR), operation navigation is displayed when internal winning is performed on the pressing order bell, thereby suppressing reduction of medals and preventing loss of interest in the game.

In addition, when the operation navigation is not displayed in the operation navigation period 1 that has been set once, there is a case of extending this (for example, adding CZ in the operation example (B4) of FIG. 41 described later), and a case of setting AR (for example, adding AR in the operation example (B5) of FIG. 42, which will be described later). Furthermore, in the state B including the omen, CZ, and AR, when the operation navigation of the push order bell is not displayed when the period of the omen, CZ, and AR ends (when the operation navigation guarantee flag is off), the operation navigation of the push order bell can be displayed, and the opportunity to display the operation navigation of the push order bell is secured.

In addition, if the navigation is not displayed even though the sign period and the operation navigation 1 period are set together, navigation is performed during the normal presentation after the end of the sign period. However, in this configuration, the player may feel uncomfortable because the navigation occurs in the normal effect in which the navigation is basically not displayed. In the first embodiment, by adding CZ when navigation does not occur in one operation navigation period, not only is it possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, but also the CZ performance makes the player expect AR and bonuses, thereby improving the interest of the game.

If the operation navigation of the push order bell is not displayed (the operation navigation assurance flag is off) and the process proceeds to RT4 or RT6, the operation navigation assurance flag is set to ON at the time of transition (Yes in step S1503 of FIG. 21). Therefore, for RT3 or RT5, there is not necessarily an opportunity to display the operation navigation of the pressing order bell, but the player is not disadvantaged because medals can be expected.

In the case of RT3 or RT5, operation navigation period 1 (operation navigation period 2 during AR) may not be provided depending on the timing of transition to RT4 or RT6 (for example, operation example (A1) in FIG. 34, operation example (A3) in FIG. 36). However, since medals can be expected in RT4 or RT6, even if such a configuration is adopted, the player will not be disadvantaged. That is, if there is little need to suppress the reduction of medals, the operation navigation period may not be provided in the bonus sign period, for example, in the case of RT3 or RT5, the operation navigation suppression period may be maintained. Also, in this configuration, the player may grasp that the operation navigation of the pushing order bell is displayed and that the operation navigation is not shifted to RT4 or RT6. In this way, by including at least the operation navigation suppression period in the bonus predicting period, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation and make it easier to comprehend the effects for increasing the interest of the game.

In the above operation examples (A1) to (A4), an operation navigation suppression period is provided when a state that is advantageous to the player (RT4 or RT6 in the first embodiment) is provided, and an operation navigation suppression period is provided even when the above advantageous state is not achieved, thereby using the operation navigation suppression period as an indication period for the above advantageous state. In the first embodiment, a configuration using a bonus is described as an example of the above-mentioned advantageous state, but this advantageous state may be started as a result of internal winning, and the contents of the advantageous state such as AR, AT, ART, and pseudo-bonus are not limited.

In addition, the internal winning result that serves as a trigger for setting the operation navigation suppression period when the situation is not advantageous is not particularly limited, and any internal winning combination that may not lead to an advantageous situation may be used. With this configuration, the operation navigation suppression period can be used as an indication period for an advantageous state.

Further, regarding the manipulation navigation suppression period, in the first embodiment, an example was described in which the manipulation navigation suppression flag was used to set the manipulation navigation of the push order bell to a state in which it was not displayed in a state in which the manipulation navigation could be displayed. Also, a part of the executable operation navigation may be suppressed. Furthermore, this operation navigation is not limited to indicating the pressing order, and may indicate the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for ...!", or may indicate both the pressing order and the timing.

Also, during the operation navigation suppression period, it is preferable to execute an effect that makes the player expect an advantageous situation.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the outcome in the game from which the internal winning result is derived to be in an advantageous state and the outcome in the game from which the internal winning result is derived, which is a trigger for setting the operation navigation suppression period in the case of not being in an advantageous state, are common outcomes. In this constitution, a series of operations from the common outcome to the operation navigation suppression period are the same whether the situation is advantageous or not, and the player can be informed that the operation navigation will be restricted by the common outcome. In addition, it is possible to heighten the expectation of being in an advantageous state. For example, in FIGS. 34 to 37, operations with condition device numbers 2 and 25 have been described, but in games in which these condition devices are derived, the outcome shown in FIG. 43(s) can be derived as a common outcome.

[Example of operation (B1): when there is only a sign]
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the state B transition lottery is won and the CZ and AR lotteries are not won (an omen is confirmed at the time of transition to state B). This operation example is different from FIG. 35 (operation example (A2)) only in the effect content. In this example, assume that the initial states are RT1 and state A (state B flag off). In this state A, operation navigation is not displayed (Yes determination in step S1001 of FIG. 16, FIGS. 18 and 19 are not executed). In the first game of FIG. 38, in addition to being in RT1 and state A, it is indicated that state A is a period during which operation navigation is not displayed (operation navigation unavailable period). As for the effect at this time, a normal effect is executed (see FIG. 43(a)).

In this state, it is assumed that the second chance (condition device number 25) is internally won in the start operation of the second game. In this case, in the state B transition lottery (step S1101 in FIG. 17), the state B transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% (FIG. 14(a), lottery type C).

When the status B transition lottery is won, the number of games that can be continued in state B is first set, and then the AR right acquisition lottery, CZ game number lottery, and precursor game number lottery (steps S1105, S1107, S1109, and S1111 in FIG. 17) are executed. In this example, it is assumed that the AR right acquisition lottery and the CZ number-of-games lottery are not won. As for the number of predictive games, it is assumed that 6 predictive games are obtained, and 3 is set as the number of operation navigation suppression games (step S1115 in FIG. 17).

After that, the game progresses, and when the reels 110 to 112 stop, the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) is executed after the medal payout process. In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in this process, the state B flag, the precursor flag, and the operation navigation suppression flag are set to ON (steps S1923, S1931, and S1941 in FIG. 25) from the results of the state B transition lottery and the like described above. As a result, the state B, the sign, and the control navigation suppression period start from the next game (the third game). Also, after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the gaming state update command, executes Chance! is executed (see FIG. 43(c)). Further, effect data is set so as to start the precursor effect (see FIG. 43(e)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (third game). FIG. 38 shows that the state B, the portent, the control navigation suppression period, and the portent effect start from the third game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the fifth game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won. However, in the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression period is still continuing, and during this operation navigation suppression period, even if the push order bell (condition device number 29 to 31) is internally won, the operation navigation is not displayed (No determination in step S1309 in FIG. 19, No determination in step S3005 in FIG. 29). FIG. 38 shows that, in the fifth game, the pressing order bell (condition device number 31) was internally won, but the operation navigation is not displayed because it is the operation navigation suppression period.

In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression flag is set to OFF when the number of operation navigation suppression games becomes 0, and the operation navigation suppression period ends (step S1941 in FIG. 25). As a result, from the next game (sixth game), a period (operation navigation period 1) is started in which the operation navigation of the pressing order bell can be performed a certain number of times. FIG. 38 shows that the operation-navigation suppression period ends in the fifth game, and the operation-navigation period 1 starts in the sixth game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the 8th game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 30) is internally won. In the eighth game, since the operation navigation period 1 (the operation navigation suppression flag is off) and the operation navigation guarantee flag is off, the operation navigation indicating the order of pressing the correct answers is displayed (step S1313 in FIG. 19, step S3007 in FIG. 29, see FIG. 43(f)). In FIG. 38, it is shown that the pressing order bell (condition device number 30) is internally won in the eighth game, and the operation navigation (middle 1st) indicating the pressing order of the correct answer is displayed.

In the operation navigation assurance flag setting process (step S1403 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the eighth game, the operation navigation assurance flag is set to ON as the operation navigation is displayed (step S1509 in FIG. 21).

Furthermore, in the sign and CZ processing (step S1407 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update processing of the eighth game, since the number of remaining predictive games is 0, the operation navigation guarantee flag is ON, the number of CZ games is 0, and the number of AR rights is 0, the state B end wait flag is set to ON (step S1625 in FIG. 22).

Furthermore, in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the eighth game, the parameters of state B are initialized (becomes state A) because the state B end wait flag is on and the operation navigation guarantee flag is on. In this process, the parameters of the sign, CZ, and AR are also initialized. As a result, the game returns to state A from the next game (9th game), and the sign and operation navigation period 1 ends. Also, after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the game state update command sets the effect data so that the normal effect (see FIG. 43(a)) is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (ninth game). FIG. 38 shows that the state B, the sign, and the operation navigation period 1 end in the eighth game, and the state A (operation navigation unavailable period) and the normal effect start respectively from the ninth game.

In the first embodiment, the number of AR rights may be added by lottery during the omen (step S1205 in FIG. 18). Therefore, even if the number of AR rights is 0 at the time of transition to state B, the number of AR rights may be greater than 0 at the end of the sign. In the above example, if the number of AR rights is not 0 in the eighth game omen and during CZ processing (step S1407 in FIG. 20), the omen ends in the eighth game, and the AR starts in the ninth game. In this case, state B is maintained even after the ninth game. In addition, in the AR, the operation navigation of the push order bell and the push order replay is displayed (operation navigation period 2), and the AR effects are executed.

[Example of operation (B2): For sign and CZ]
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the status B transition lottery is won, the number of CZ games of 3 games is obtained, and the AR lottery is not won (an omen and CZ are determined at the time of transition to state B). In this example, assume that the initial states are RT1 and state A (state B flag off). In this state A, operation navigation is not displayed (Yes determination in step S1001 of FIG. 16, FIGS. 18 and 19 are not executed). In the first game of FIG. 39, in addition to being RT1 and state A, it is indicated that state A is a period during which operation navigation is not displayed (operation navigation unavailable period). As for the effect at this time, a normal effect is executed (see FIG. 43(a)).

In this state, it is assumed that the second chance (condition device number 25) is internally won in the start operation of the second game. In this case, in the state B transition lottery (step S1101 in FIG. 17), the state B transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% (FIG. 14(a), lottery type C).

When the status B transition lottery is won, the number of games that can be continued in state B is first set, and then the AR right acquisition lottery, CZ game number lottery, and precursor game number lottery (steps S1105, S1107, S1109, and S1111 in FIG. 17) are executed. In this example, it is assumed that the number of CZ games of 3 games has been obtained and the AR right acquisition lottery has not been won. As for the number of predictive games, it is assumed that 6 predictive games are obtained, and 3 is set as the number of operation navigation suppression games (step S1115 in FIG. 17).

After that, the game progresses, and when the reels 110 to 112 stop, the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) is executed after the medal payout process. In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in this process, the state B flag, the precursor flag, and the operation navigation suppression flag are set to ON (steps S1923, S1931, and S1941 in FIG. 25) from the results of the state B transition lottery and the like described above. As a result, the state B, the sign, and the control navigation suppression period start from the next game (the third game). Also, after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the gaming state update command, executes Chance! is executed (see FIG. 43(c)). Further, effect data is set so as to start the precursor effect (see FIG. 43(e)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (third game). FIG. 39 shows that the state B, the portent, the control navigation suppression period, and the portent effect start from the third game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the fifth game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won. However, in the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression period is still continuing, and during this operation navigation suppression period, even if the push order bell (condition device number 29 to 31) is internally won, the operation navigation is not displayed (No determination in step S1309 in FIG. 19, No determination in step S3005 in FIG. 29). FIG. 39 shows that although the push order bell (condition device number 31) was internally won in the fifth game, the operation navigation is not displayed because it is the operation navigation suppression period.

In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression flag is set to OFF when the number of operation navigation suppression games becomes 0, and the operation navigation suppression period ends (step S1941 in FIG. 25). As a result, from the next game (sixth game), a period (operation navigation period 1) is started in which the operation navigation of the pressing order bell can be performed a certain number of times. FIG. 39 shows that the operation-navigation suppression period ends in the fifth game, and the operation-navigation period 1 starts in the sixth game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the 8th game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 30) is internally won. In the eighth game, since the operation navigation period 1 (the operation navigation suppression flag is off) and the operation navigation guarantee flag is off, the operation navigation indicating the order of pressing the correct answers is displayed (step S1313 in FIG. 19, step S3007 in FIG. 29, see FIG. 43(f)). FIG. 39 shows that in the eighth game, the pressing order bell (condition device number 30) is internally won, and the operation navigation (middle 1st) indicating the pressing order of the correct answer is displayed.

In the operation navigation assurance flag setting process (step S1403 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the eighth game, the operation navigation assurance flag is set to ON as the operation navigation is displayed (step S1509 in FIG. 21).

Furthermore, in the omen and CZ process (step S1407 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the eighth game, since the number of omen remaining games is 0, the operation navigation guarantee flag is on, and the number of CZ games is 3, the CZ flag is set to on, and the number of CZ games is set to the number of omen remaining games (steps S1609 and S1611 in FIG. 22). As a result, CZ starts from the next game (9th game). Note that the number of CZ games is initialized to 0 (step S1613 in FIG. 22). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes sets the effect data so as to start the CZ effect (see FIG. 43(j)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (ninth game). FIG. 39 shows that the portent and the portent effect are finished in the eighth game, and the CZ and the CZ effect are started in the ninth game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the tenth game, it is assumed that the push order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won. In the tenth game, the operation navigation period is 1 (the operation navigation suppression flag is off), but the operation navigation guarantee flag is set to on. In this case, even if the push order bell (condition device number 29 to 31) is internally won, the operation navigation is not displayed (No judgment in step S1311 in FIG. 19, No judgment in step S3005 in FIG. 29). In the first embodiment, this configuration limits the number of times the bell operation navigation is displayed in the operation navigation period 1 to one. FIG. 39 shows that the operation navigation is not displayed although the push order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won in the tenth game.

In the eleventh game, a judgment effect is set by the start operation of the start lever 135 (step S3009 in FIG. 29). This judge effect is an effect to announce whether or not the AR or bonus is won, but here, it is announced that there is no AR or bonus at the timing of the third stop.

Furthermore, in the sign and CZ processing (step S1407 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update processing of the 11th game, the number of remaining sign remaining games is 0, the operation navigation guarantee flag is on, the number of CZ games is 0, and the number of AR rights is 0, so the state B end wait flag is set to on (step S1625 in FIG. 22).

Furthermore, in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the 11th game, the parameters of state B are initialized (becomes state A) because the state B end wait flag is on and the operation navigation guarantee flag is on. In this process, the parameters of the sign, CZ, and AR are also initialized. As a result, the game returns to the state A from the next game (12th game), and the CZ and operation navigation period 1 ends.

Also, after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the game state update command sets the effect data so as to start the normal effect (see FIG. 43(a)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (12th game). FIG. 39 shows that state B, CZ, operation navigation period 1 ends in the 11th game, and state A (operation navigation unavailable period) and normal effect start from the 12th game.

In the first embodiment, the number of AR rights may be added by lottery during the omen and CZ (step S1205 in FIG. 18). Therefore, even if the number of AR rights is 0 at the time of transition to state B, the number of AR rights may be greater than 0 at the end of CZ. In the above example, if the number of AR rights is not 0 in the premonitory and CZ process of the 11th game (step S1407 in FIG. 20), CZ ends in the 11th game and AR starts in the 12th game. In this case, state B is maintained even after the 12th game. In addition, in the AR, the operation navigation of the push order bell and the push order replay is displayed (operation navigation period 2), and the AR effects are executed.

[Operation example (B3): Omen, CZ and AR]
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the state B transition lottery is won, the number of CZ games of 3 games is obtained, the AR lottery is won, and the number of AR rights becomes 1 (sign, CZ, and AR are determined when transitioning to state B). In this example, assume that the initial states are RT1 and state A (state B flag off). In this state A, operation navigation is not displayed (Yes determination in step S1001 of FIG. 16, FIGS. 18 and 19 are not executed). In the first game of FIG. 40, in addition to being in RT1 and state A, it is indicated that state A is a period during which operation navigation is not displayed (operation navigation unavailable period). As for the effect at this time, a normal effect is executed (see FIG. 43(a)).

In this state, it is assumed that the second chance (condition device number 25) is internally won in the start operation of the second game. In this case, in the state B transition lottery (step S1101 in FIG. 17), the state B transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% (FIG. 14(a), lottery type C).

When the status B transition lottery is won, the number of games that can be continued in state B is first set, and then the AR right acquisition lottery, CZ game number lottery, and precursor game number lottery (steps S1105, S1107, S1109, and S1111 in FIG. 17) are executed. In this example, it is assumed that the number of CZ games of 3 games is obtained and the number of AR rights is 1. As for the number of predictive games, it is assumed that 6 predictive games are obtained, and 3 is set as the number of operation navigation suppression games (step S1115 in FIG. 17).

After that, the game progresses, and when the reels 110 to 112 stop, the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) is executed after the medal payout process. In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in this process, the state B flag, the precursor flag, and the operation navigation suppression flag are set to ON (steps S1923, S1931, and S1941 in FIG. 25) from the results of the state B transition lottery and the like described above. As a result, the state B, the sign, and the control navigation suppression period start from the next game (the third game). Also, after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the gaming state update command, executes Chance! is executed (see FIG. 43(c)). Further, effect data is set so as to start the precursor effect (see FIG. 43(e)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (third game). FIG. 40 shows that the state B, the precursor, the control navigation suppression period, and the precursor effect start from the third game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the fifth game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won. However, in the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression period is still continuing, and during this operation navigation suppression period, even if the push order bell (condition device number 29 to 31) is internally won, the operation navigation is not displayed (No determination in step S1309 in FIG. 19, No determination in step S3005 in FIG. 29). FIG. 40 shows that, in the fifth game, the pressing order bell (condition device number 31) was internally won, but the operation navigation is not displayed because it is the operation navigation suppression period.

In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression flag is set to OFF when the number of operation navigation suppression games becomes 0, and the operation navigation suppression period ends (step S1941 in FIG. 25). As a result, from the next game (sixth game), a period (operation navigation period 1) is started in which the operation navigation of the pressing order bell can be performed a certain number of times. FIG. 40 shows that the operation-navigation suppression period ends in the fifth game, and the operation-navigation period 1 starts in the sixth game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the 8th game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 30) is internally won. In the eighth game, since the operation navigation period 1 (the operation navigation suppression flag is off) and the operation navigation guarantee flag is off, the operation navigation indicating the order of pressing the correct answers is displayed (step S1313 in FIG. 19, step S3007 in FIG. 29, see FIG. 43(f)). FIG. 40 shows that the push order bell (condition device number 30) is internally won in the eighth game, and the operation navigation (middle 1st) showing the correct push order is displayed.

In the operation navigation assurance flag setting process (step S1403 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the eighth game, the operation navigation assurance flag is set to ON as the operation navigation is displayed (step S1509 in FIG. 21).

Furthermore, in the omen and CZ process (step S1407 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the eighth game, since the number of omen remaining games is 0, the operation navigation guarantee flag is on, and the number of CZ games is 3, the CZ flag is set to on, and the number of CZ games is set to the number of omen remaining games (steps S1609 and S1611 in FIG. 22). As a result, CZ starts from the next game (9th game). Note that the number of CZ games is initialized to 0 (step S1613 in FIG. 22). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes sets the effect data so as to start the CZ effect (see FIG. 43(j)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (ninth game). FIG. 40 shows that the portent and the portent effect are finished in the eighth game, and the CZ and the CZ effect are started in the ninth game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the tenth game, it is assumed that the push order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won. In the tenth game, the operation navigation period is 1 (the operation navigation suppression flag is off), but the operation navigation guarantee flag is set to on. In this case, even if the push order bell (condition device number 29 to 31) is internally won, the operation navigation is not displayed (No judgment in step S1311 in FIG. 19, No judgment in step S3005 in FIG. 29). In the first embodiment, this configuration limits the number of times the bell operation navigation is displayed in the operation navigation period 1 to one. FIG. 40 shows that the operation navigation is not displayed although the push order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won in the 10th game.

In the eleventh game, a judgment effect is set by the start operation of the start lever 135 (step S3009 in FIG. 29). This judge effect is an effect for notifying the presence or absence of winning an AR or a bonus, and here, at the timing of the third stop, it is announced that the AR will start (FIG. 43(l)).

Furthermore, in the sign and CZ processing (step S1407 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update processing of the 11th game, since the number of remaining sign games is 0, the operation navigation guarantee flag is on, the number of CZ games is 0, and the number of AR rights is 1, the CZ flag is set to off, and settings are made to start AR (steps S1615 and S1623 in FIG. 22).

Furthermore, in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) that is subsequently executed in the game state update process of the 11th game, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S1931 in FIG. 25). By the processing so far, when the state B flag is on, the precursor flag and the CZ flag are off, and the number of AR remaining games is not 0, the AR starts from the next game (12th game). In the AR, this is the period (operation navigation period 2) during which the operation navigation for the push order bell and the push order replay is displayed. Also, after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the game state update command sets the effect data so that the AR effect is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (12th game). FIG. 40 shows that the CZ and operation navigation period 1 end in the 11th game, and the AR (operation navigation period 2) and the AR effect start respectively from the 12th game.

[Operation example (B4): When CZ is added]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the state B transition lottery is won and the CZ and AR lotteries are not won (an omen is confirmed at the time of transition to state B). In this example, assume that the initial states are RT1 and state A (state B flag off). In this state A, operation navigation is not displayed (Yes determination in step S1001 of FIG. 16, FIGS. 18 and 19 are not executed). In the first game of FIG. 41, in addition to being in RT1 and state A, it is indicated that state A is a period during which operation navigation is not displayed (operation navigation disabled period). As for the effect at this time, a normal effect is executed (see FIG. 43(a)).

In this state, it is assumed that the second chance (condition device number 25) is internally won in the start operation of the second game. In this case, in the state B transition lottery (step S1101 in FIG. 17), the state B transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% (FIG. 14(a), lottery type C).

When the status B transition lottery is won, the number of games that can be continued in state B is first set, and then the AR right acquisition lottery, CZ game number lottery, and precursor game number lottery (steps S1105, S1107, S1109, and S1111 in FIG. 17) are executed. In this example, it is assumed that the AR right acquisition lottery and the CZ number-of-games lottery are not won. As for the number of predictive games, it is assumed that 6 predictive games are obtained, and 3 is set as the number of operation navigation suppression games (step S1115 in FIG. 17).

After that, the game progresses, and when the reels 110 to 112 stop, the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) is executed after the medal payout process. In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in this process, the state B flag, the precursor flag, and the operation navigation suppression flag are set to ON (steps S1923, S1931, and S1941 in FIG. 25) from the results of the state B transition lottery and the like described above. As a result, the state B, the sign, and the control navigation suppression period start from the next game (the third game). Also, after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the gaming state update command, executes Chance! is executed (see FIG. 43(c)). Further, effect data is set so as to start the precursor effect (see FIG. 43(e)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (third game). FIG. 41 shows that the state B, the portent, the control navigation suppression period, and the portent effect start from the third game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the fifth game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won. However, in the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression period is still continuing, and during this operation navigation suppression period, even if the push order bell (condition device number 29 to 31) is internally won, the operation navigation is not displayed (No determination in step S1309 in FIG. 19, No determination in step S3005 in FIG. 29). FIG. 41 shows that in the 5th game, the pressing order bell (condition device number 31) was internally won, but the operation navigation is not displayed because it is the operation navigation suppression period.

In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression flag is set to OFF when the number of operation navigation suppression games becomes 0, and the operation navigation suppression period ends (step S1941 in FIG. 25). As a result, from the next game (sixth game), a period (operation navigation period 1) is started in which the operation navigation of the pressing order bell can be performed a certain number of times. FIG. 41 shows that the operation-navigation suppression period ends in the fifth game, and the operation-navigation period 1 starts in the sixth game.

After that, the game progresses, but it is assumed that an internal winning is not made at the pressing order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31) during the 6th to 8th games (operation navigation period 1). In this case, the operation navigation assurance flag remains off. Then, in the omen and CZ process (step S1407 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process for the eighth game, since the number of remaining omen games is 0 and the operation navigation guarantee flag is off, CZ addition determination processing is executed (step S1605 in FIG. 22). In this process, since no bonus has been internally won, there is neither the number of AR rights nor the number of CZ games, and the CZ flag is off, a lottery for the number of AR rights is executed and the number of CZ games is set to 3 (steps S1709 and S1711 in FIG. 23). Here, it is assumed that the number of AR rights could not be acquired.

When the CZ addition determination process ends and the process returns to the portent and CZ process, the CZ flag is set to ON because the number of CZ games is 3, and the number of CZ games is set to the number of remaining portent games (steps S1609 and S1611 in FIG. 22). As a result, CZ starts from the next game (9th game). Note that the number of CZ games is initialized to 0 (step S1613 in FIG. 22). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes sets the effect data so as to start the CZ effect (see FIG. 43(j)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (ninth game). FIG. 41 shows that the portent and the portent effect are finished in the eighth game, and the CZ and the CZ effect are started in the ninth game. Note that FIG. 41 uses the notation CZ (addition), which indicates that this CZ was added later due to the operation navigation not being displayed.

After that, the game progresses, and in the tenth game, it is assumed that the push order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won. In the tenth game, since the operation navigation period 1 (the operation navigation suppression flag is off) and the operation navigation guarantee flag is off, the operation navigation indicating the order of pressing the correct answers is displayed (step S1313 in FIG. 19, step S3007 in FIG. 29, see FIG. 43(k)). FIG. 41 shows that the push order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won in the 10th game, and the operation navigation (right 1st) showing the correct push order is displayed.

In the operation navigation assurance flag setting process (step S1403 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the tenth game, the operation navigation assurance flag is set to ON as the operation navigation is displayed (step S1509 in FIG. 21).

In the eleventh game, a judgment effect is set by the start operation of the start lever 135 (step S3009 in FIG. 29). This judge effect is an effect to announce whether or not the AR or bonus is won, but here, it is announced that there is no AR or bonus at the timing of the third stop.

Furthermore, in the sign and CZ processing (step S1407 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update processing of the 11th game, the number of remaining sign remaining games is 0, the operation navigation guarantee flag is on, the number of CZ games is 0, and the number of AR rights is 0, so the state B end wait flag is set to on (step S1625 in FIG. 22).

Furthermore, in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the 11th game, the parameters of state B are initialized (becomes state A) because the state B end wait flag is on and the operation navigation guarantee flag is on. In this process, the parameters of the sign, CZ, and AR are also initialized. As a result, the game returns to the state A from the next game (12th game), and the CZ and operation navigation period 1 ends.

Also, after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the game state update command sets the effect data so as to start the normal effect (see FIG. 43(a)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (12th game). FIG. 41 shows that state B, CZ, operation navigation period 1 ends in the 11th game, and state A (operation navigation unavailable period) and normal effect start from the 12th game.

In the above operation, the number of AR rights is 0 at the end of the 8th game, but the number of AR rights may be added by lottery during the CZ addition determination process of the 8th game or the CZ of the 9th to 11th games (step S1709 in FIG. 23, step S1205 in FIG. 18). Therefore, even if the number of AR rights is 0 at the time of transition to state B, the number of AR rights may be greater than 0 at the end of CZ. In the above example, if the number of AR rights is not 0 in the premonitory and CZ process of the 11th game (step S1407 in FIG. 20), CZ ends in the 11th game and AR starts in the 12th game. In this case, state B is maintained even after the 12th game. In addition, in the AR, the operation navigation of the push order bell and the push order replay is displayed (operation navigation period 2), and the AR effects are executed.

[Operation example (B5): When CZ and AR are added]
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the status B transition lottery is won and the CZ and AR lotteries are not won (the portent is confirmed at the time of transition to the state B). In this example, assume that the initial states are RT1 and state A (state B flag off). In this state A, operation navigation is not displayed (Yes determination in step S1001 of FIG. 16, FIGS. 18 and 19 are not executed). In the first game of FIG. 42, in addition to being in RT1 and state A, it is shown that state A is a period during which operation navigation is not displayed (operation navigation unavailable period). As for the effect at this time, a normal effect is executed (see FIG. 43(a)).

In this state, it is assumed that the second chance (condition device number 25) is internally won in the start operation of the second game. In this case, in the state B transition lottery (step S1101 in FIG. 17), the state B transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% (FIG. 14(a), lottery type C).

When the status B transition lottery is won, the number of games that can be continued in state B is first set, and then the AR right acquisition lottery, CZ game number lottery, and precursor game number lottery (steps S1105, S1107, S1109, and S1111 in FIG. 17) are executed. In this example, it is assumed that the AR right acquisition lottery and the CZ number-of-games lottery are not won. As for the number of predictive games, it is assumed that 6 predictive games are obtained, and 3 is set as the number of operation navigation suppression games (step S1115 in FIG. 17).

After that, the game progresses, and when the reels 110 to 112 stop, the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) is executed after the medal payout process. In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in this process, the state B flag, the precursor flag, and the operation navigation suppression flag are set to ON (steps S1923, S1931, and S1941 in FIG. 25) from the results of the state B transition lottery and the like described above. As a result, the state B, the sign, and the control navigation suppression period start from the next game (the third game). Also, after these processes, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the gaming state update command, executes Chance! is executed (see FIG. 43(c)). Further, effect data is set so as to start the precursor effect (see FIG. 43(e)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (third game). FIG. 42 shows that the state B, the portent, the control navigation suppression period, and the portent effect start from the third game.

After that, the game progresses, and in the fifth game, it is assumed that the push-order bell (condition device number 31) is internally won. However, in the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression period is still continuing, and during this operation navigation suppression period, even if the push order bell (condition device number 29 to 31) is internally won, the operation navigation is not displayed (No determination in step S1309 in FIG. 19, No determination in step S3005 in FIG. 29). FIG. 42 shows that, in the 5th game, the pressing order bell (condition device number 31) was internally won, but the operation navigation is not displayed because it is the operation navigation suppression period.

In the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process of the fifth game, the operation navigation suppression flag is set to OFF when the number of operation navigation suppression games becomes 0, and the operation navigation suppression period ends (step S1941 in FIG. 25). As a result, from the next game (sixth game), a period (operation navigation period 1) is started in which the operation navigation of the pressing order bell can be performed a certain number of times. FIG. 42 shows that the operation-navigation suppression period ends in the fifth game, and the operation-navigation period 1 starts in the sixth game.

After that, the game progresses, but it is assumed that an internal winning is not made at the pressing order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31) during the 6th to 8th games (operation navigation period 1). In this case, the operation navigation assurance flag remains off. Then, in the omen and CZ process (step S1407 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update process for the eighth game, since the number of remaining omen games is 0 and the operation navigation guarantee flag is off, CZ addition determination processing is executed (step S1605 in FIG. 22). In this process, since no bonus has been internally won, there is neither the number of AR rights nor the number of CZ games, and the CZ flag is off, a lottery for the number of AR rights is executed and the number of CZ games is set to 3 (steps S1709 and S1711 in FIG. 23). Here, it is assumed that the number of AR rights could not be obtained.

When the CZ addition determination process ends and the process returns to the portent and CZ process, the CZ flag is set to ON because the number of CZ games is 3, and the number of CZ games is set to the number of remaining portent games (steps S1609 and S1611 in FIG. 22). As a result, CZ starts from the next game (9th game). Note that the number of CZ games is initialized to 0 (step S1613 in FIG. 22). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes sets the effect data so as to start the CZ effect (see FIG. 43(j)) at the timing of the start operation of the next game (ninth game). FIG. 42 shows that the portent and the portent effect are finished in the eighth game, and the CZ and the CZ effect are started in the ninth game. Note that FIG. 42 uses the notation CZ (addition), which indicates that this CZ was added later because the operation navigation was not displayed.

After that, the game progresses, but it is assumed that during the 9th to 11th games (operation navigation period 1), there is no internal winning at the pressing order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31). In this case as well, the operation navigation guarantee flag remains off.

In the eleventh game, a judgment effect is set by the start operation of the start lever 135 (step S3009 in FIG. 29). This judge effect is an effect to announce whether or not the AR or bonus is won, but here, it is announced that there is no AR or bonus at the timing of the third stop.

Furthermore, in the sign and CZ processing (step S1407 in FIG. 20) executed in the game state update processing of the 11th game, since the number of remaining sign games is 0 and the operation navigation guarantee flag is off, CZ addition determination processing is executed (step S1605 in FIG. 22). However, since the CZ flag is ON, CZ will not be added again (No determination in step S1707 in FIG. 23). Then, when the CZ flag is set to OFF in subsequent processing, 1 is added to the number of AR rights because the operation navigation guarantee flag is OFF, and settings are made to start AR (steps S1615, S1619, and S1623 in FIG. 22).

Furthermore, in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) that is subsequently executed in the game state update process of the 11th game, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S1931 in FIG. 25). By the processing so far, when the state B flag is on, the precursor flag and the CZ flag are off, and the number of AR remaining games is not 0, the AR starts from the next game (12th game). In the AR, this is the period (operation navigation period 2) during which the operation navigation for the push order bell and the push order replay is displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes executes a judgment effect (effect that overturns the judgment effect at the time of the third stop operation) that announces the start of AR (Fig. 43 (l)). Further, effect data is set so that the AR effect is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (12th game). FIG. 42 shows that the CZ and operation navigation period 1 end in the 11th game, and the AR (operation navigation period 2) and the AR effect start respectively from the 12th game. Note that FIG. 42 uses the notation of AR (addition), which indicates that this AR was added later because the operation navigation was not displayed.

[Operation examples (B1) to (B5)]
In the slot machine 100 of the first embodiment, AR is provided as one of the states advantageous to the player. This AR is configured to be set after a waiting period, and in the first embodiment, a sign or CZ is configured to be set during this waiting period (for example, operation example (B3) in FIG. 40). In addition, even when AR is not set (not in the standby period), there are cases where a sign or CZ is set (for example, operation example (B1) in FIG. 38, operation example (B2) in FIG. 39). That is, it is configured so that common actions (including not only active actions (doing) but also passive actions (doing not do)) can occur both when AR is set and when AR is not set. A player who sees this common action expects the AR to start, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Due to these effects, the period during which the above-described common operation can occur is a predictive period for the start of AR (hereafter referred to as an AR predictive period).

During the AR predictive period, even if the number of medals decreases, the player has no choice but to accept the decrease until the result is determined. For this reason, for example, it is conceivable to suppress the decrease in medals during the AR prediction period by displaying the operation navigation when internally winning the push order bell during the AR prediction period. However, during the AR prediction period, various effects may be performed to make the player expect to receive AR. If the operation navigation is displayed during such an effect, it becomes difficult to grasp the effect, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced.

In the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which an operation navigation suppression period and an operation navigation period 1 are provided in an AR sign period (sign or CZ) (for example, operation examples (B1) to (B3) in FIGS. 38 to 40). Since the operation navigation is not displayed during the operation navigation suppression period, it is possible to easily comprehend the effect for enhancing the interest of the game. Further, in the operation navigation period 1, by displaying the operation navigation when internally winning the push-order bell, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the medals and prevent the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the operation navigation is not displayed in the operation navigation period 1 once set, there is a case of extending this (for example, adding CZ in the operation example (B4) of FIG. 41), and a case of setting AR (for example, adding AR in the operation example (B5) of FIG. 42). Furthermore, in the state B including the omen, CZ, and AR, when the operation navigation of the push order bell is not displayed when the period of the omen, CZ, and AR ends (when the operation navigation guarantee flag is off), the operation navigation of the push order bell can be displayed, and the opportunity to display the operation navigation of the push order bell is guaranteed.

In addition, if the navigation is not displayed even though the sign period and the operation navigation 1 period are set together, navigation is performed during the normal presentation after the end of the sign period. However, in this configuration, the player may feel uncomfortable because the navigation occurs in the normal effect in which the navigation is basically not displayed. In the first embodiment, by adding CZ when navigation does not occur in one operation navigation period, not only is it possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity, but also the CZ performance makes the player expect AR and bonuses, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the above configuration, the operation navigation suppression period and the operation navigation period 1 are combined in the omen and CZ, but if there is little need to suppress the decrease in medals, the operation navigation period 1 may not be provided in the AR omen period. For example, if it is certain that the AR will be set, the operation navigation suppression period may continue until the AR is set. Since AR can be expected to win medals, even if such a configuration is adopted, the player will not be disadvantaged. Also, in this configuration, the player may grasp that the AR is not set by displaying the operation navigation of the pressing order bell, but at least during the operation navigation suppression period, the player can be prevented from knowing whether the AR is set or not, and the player can have a sense of expectation. In this way, by including at least the operation navigation suppression period in the AR predictive period, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation and make it easier to comprehend the effects for increasing the interest of the game. On the other hand, when it is highly necessary to suppress the reduction of medals, the operation navigation suppression period may not be provided in the AR predictive period. That is, since at least the operation navigation period is provided in the AR indication period, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the decrease in medals.

As described in the above operation examples (B1) to (B5), the first embodiment adopts a configuration in which, in the first period in which operation navigation can be displayed (operation navigation period 1 in the precursor in the first embodiment), if operation navigation is not displayed, a second period in which operation navigation can be displayed (operation navigation period 1 by CZ) is set, and if operation navigation is displayed, the second period in which operation navigation can be displayed is not set.

In the first embodiment, the operation navigation period 1 in the precursor corresponds to an example of the first period, but this first period may be in a state where the probability of adding the number of CZ or AT games is higher than in normal times, and any period can be adopted as long as the operation navigation can be executed. Further, in the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which CZ is added as the second period, but this period may also be a period in which operation navigation can be performed. For example, the first period may be extended to become the second period, or the second period may be a period more advantageous to the player than the first period, such as increasing the probability of adding the number of AT games.

Further, in the first embodiment, the configuration in which the second period is provided following the first period has been described, but the first period and the second period may be provided separately, for example, the second period is provided with a predetermined number of games interposed from the first period. In the case where the second period is provided following the first period as in the first embodiment, the first effect executed during the first period (predictive effect in the first embodiment) ends in time with the first period, and the second effect executed in the second period (CZ effect in the first embodiment) starts in time with the second period, so that the player can easily grasp that the second period has started due to the first effect and the second effect.

Also, in the first embodiment, the second period is more advantageous than the first period (in the first embodiment, an additional AR may be won, FIG. 14(c)). The difference in advantage between the first period and the second period is not limited to this configuration, but by making the second period more advantageous than the first period as in the first embodiment, the player can easily maintain his sense of expectation.

[Modified example of repeating operation navigation suppression period and operation navigation period during AR (operation examples (C1) to (C4))]
In the above operation examples (B1) to (B5), when the operation navigation is not displayed in the first period during which the operation navigation can be displayed, the second period during which the operation navigation can be displayed is set, and when the operation navigation is displayed, the second period during which the operation navigation can be displayed is not set (Figs. 38 to 42). A modification different from the above-described first embodiment will be described below with respect to the configuration employing the first period and the second period.

The modified example described below employs a configuration in which the operation navigation period 2 and the operation navigation suppression period are alternately provided during the AR. In this operation navigation period 2, when the push order bell and the push order replay are internally won, the operation navigation indicating the correct operation order is displayed. In addition, during the control navigation suppression period, the display of control navigation is suppressed in the case of internal winning in the pressing order bell (step S1321 in FIG. 19). In addition, in this modification, when the number of display times of the operation navigation of the push order bell during the operation navigation period 2 does not reach the minimum display number (one time in the example below), the number of games of the operation navigation period 2 is added.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the operation (operation example (C1)) in the modification. This example shows the operation during AR, assume RT2 and state B (state B flag on) throughout. In this example, an operation navigation period 2 of 3 games and an operation navigation suppression period of 3 games are provided alternately. In this operation navigation period 2, the number of sets is assigned to each section such that the first time is the first set, the second time is the second set, etc. Here, the first to third games correspond to the first set, and the seventh to ninth games correspond to the second set.

In the first set, an effect including display of the number of sets is executed as shown in FIG. 48(a), but when further operation navigation is displayed, the display of push order navigation is executed in addition to the effect of FIG. 48(a) as shown in FIG. 48(b). The second set is the same as the first set, and as shown in FIG. 48(c), an effect including the display of the number of sets is executed, and when operation navigation is displayed, the display of push order navigation is executed in addition to the effect of FIG. 48(c), as shown in FIG. 48(d). Further, during the manipulation navigation restraint period, an effect of displaying the characters "resting" is executed as shown in FIG. 48(e).

FIG. 44 shows that in each of the first and second sets of the operation navigation period 2, the push order bell was internally won and the operation navigation was displayed (1st, 2nd, and 8th games). Also, during the operation navigation suppression period, it is shown that the operation navigation is not displayed although the push order bell is internally won (5th and 10th games).

In the operation example (C1) of FIG. 44, the operation navigation period 2 ends as planned because the operation navigation has reached the minimum number of times of display in both the operation navigation period 2 of the first set and the second set.

FIG. 45 shows an operation (operation example (C2)) when operation navigation does not reach the minimum number of times of display in operation navigation period 2 of the first set. In the operation example (C2) of FIG. 45, the first set was scheduled to end in the third game, as in the operation example (C1) of FIG. Then, in response to the fact that the operation navigation of the push order bell is displayed in the fifth game, the operation navigation period 2 of the first set ends. In addition, in FIG. 45, a configuration is employed in which the subsequent schedule is shifted by the number of games in the operation navigation period 2 added.

FIG. 46 shows an operation (operation example (C3)) when operation navigation does not reach the minimum number of times of display in operation navigation period 2 of the first set. In this example, as in the operation example (C2) of FIG. 45, the operation navigation period 2 of the first set, which is scheduled to end in the third game, continues as it is because the operation navigation does not reach the minimum number of display times (addition of 2 games during the operation navigation period), and then, in response to the operation navigation of the pressing order bell being displayed in the fifth game, the operation navigation period 2 of the first set ends. The operation example (C3) in FIG. 46 employs a configuration in which the operation navigation suppression period is reduced by the number of games in the operation navigation period 2 added. Therefore, the schedules of the operation navigation period 2 and the operation navigation suppression period from the sixth game onward are the same as in FIG. The operation example (C3) in FIG. 46 differs from the operation example (C2) in FIG. 45 in this respect. Note that if a configuration is employed in which the operation navigation suppression period is reduced by the number of games added in the operation navigation period 2, the operation navigation suppression period may disappear. For example, as in the operation example (C4) in FIG. 47, when the operation navigation period 2 of the first set does not end and the operation navigation period 2 of the second set starts, these operation navigation periods 2 are connected to one. In this case, the operation navigation period 2 of the second set may be treated as the first set, and further, in this case, the effect of the first set (the same effect) may be performed.

The number of games in the operation navigation period 2, the number of games in the operation navigation suppression period, and the minimum number of times the operation navigation is displayed can be any number. Also, the number of games may differ between the operation navigation period 2 and the operation navigation suppression period, and the number of games and the minimum number of games may be determined by lottery.

In adopting the configuration of the above modified example, for example, the number of remaining games in the operation navigation period is separately provided, the operation navigation suppression flag is set to ON when the number of remaining games in the operation navigation period becomes 0, and the number of remaining games in the operation navigation period is set again when the operation navigation suppression flag is turned off.

44 to 47 are in common with the configurations described in the operation examples (B1) to (B5) in that if the operation navigation is not displayed in the first period during which the operation navigation can be displayed (operation navigation period 2 in the modification), a second period (corresponding to an extension of the operation navigation period 2) is set in which the operation navigation can be displayed, and if the operation navigation is displayed, the second period during which the operation navigation can be displayed is not set. Furthermore, in this modification, a third period during which manipulation navigation is not permitted (manipulation navigation suppression period) is provided after the second period if there is one, or after the first period if there is no second period, and further, a first period is newly set after the third period. Note that, for this modification, the configurations described in the operation examples (B1) to (B5) may be combined as appropriate.

[Operation example at the end of state B (first embodiment)]
[Example of operation (D1): When the number of games in state B reaches the upper limit]
The first embodiment employs a configuration in which the number of remaining AR games is added, and this may lengthen the period of state B in which medals are likely to be obtained. Here, if the period of state B becomes too long, gambling will increase, so in the first embodiment, an upper limit (for example, 1500) is set for the number of games in state B, and state B ends when this upper limit number of games is reached. In addition, since there is a possibility that the amusement of the game may be lost if the state B is abruptly terminated, a configuration is adopted in which the end of the state B is grasped in advance by executing the ending performance (END 1 performance in the first embodiment) before the state B is terminated. This operation will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of the operation when the number of games in state B reaches the upper limit and ends. In the following figures, in the item "number of games", the period from the start operation of the game (operation of the start lever 135) to the start operation of the next game is shown as one game period. Also, the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective and the timing at which all the reels are stopped within the period of one game are indicated by short vertical lines.

In the operation example of FIG. 49, the initial state (first game) is RT2, and the AR flag and the state B flag are on. Also, as the number of games played in state B increases, the number of games that can be continued in state B decreases (step S1911 in FIG. 25). In the operation example of FIG. In addition, when the push order replay (condition device numbers 22 to 24) is internally won, the operation is performed according to the correct operation order, and the normal replay (either replay combination 1 or replay combination 2) is won. In addition, when the press order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31) is internally won, the correct operation order is followed to win the bell (small win 23).

First, in the first game (1480th game), the push order replay (condition device numbers 22 to 24) is internally won and the game proceeds. In this game, when the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, in the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) executed after processing such as payout of medals, in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20), 1 is subtracted from the number of games that can be continued in state B, and the value becomes 20 (step S1911 in FIG. 25). When the number of games that can be continued in state B reaches 20, the END1 flag is set to ON and the AR flag is set to OFF (steps S1913, S1915, and S1917 in FIG. 25). After the END1 flag is set to ON, operation navigation is executed even if the AR flag is set to OFF (step S1321 in FIG. 19). Further, when the END1 flag is ON, processing such as subtraction of the number of AR remaining games is not executed (No determination in step S1211 in FIG. 18).

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes sets the effect data so that the END1 effect is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (second game) (step S3117 in FIG. 30, step S3203 in FIG. 31). FIG. 49 shows that the END1 effect starts from the second game. That is, the lapse of the 1480th game in the state B (or the start of the 1481st game) is the condition for starting the END1 effect.

This END1 effect is a effect consisting of 10 scenes that continue until the state B ends. These scenes are configured to be switched every two games (step S3305 in FIG. 32), and the entire END1 effect is performed over 20 games. FIG. 49 shows that each scene of the END1 effect is switched every two games. Also, when the 1500th game in state B ends, the value of the number of games that can be continued in state B becomes 0, and state B ends (No judgment in step S1905 in FIG. 25, step S1919), but it is shown that the END1 effect ends in conjunction with the end of state B (1500th game). After that, FIG. 49 shows that the state A is set in the game following the 1500th game in the state B, and the normal effect is being executed.

[Example of operation (D2): When the net increase in medals reaches the upper limit in state B]
As described in the above operation example (D1), in the first embodiment, the state B is terminated when the number of games in the state B reaches the upper limit (for example, 1500). In addition, in order to prevent the gambling nature from increasing, the net increase in number of medals in the state B is also set to an upper limit (for example, 2400).

Specifically, a variable (MY counter, initial value 0) for storing the number of net increase in medals is provided, and the net increase in number for each game is calculated from the difference between the number of used medals and the number of payouts, and is added to the MY counter (step S1A03 in FIG. 26). Here, when the net increase in the number of sheets is negative, the value of the MY counter decreases, but when the value of the MY counter turns negative at this time, the value of the MY counter is reset to 0 (step S1A07 in FIG. 26). Then, when the value of the MY counter reaches the upper limit (for example, 2400), state B ends (the number of games that can be continued in state B is set to 0 in step S1A19 of FIG. 26, and step S1919 of FIG. 25 is executed). Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the state B ends when the upper limit (for example, 2400) is reached, and a configuration in which the state B ends when the upper limit is exceeded may be employed.

Even when the state B is terminated by the MY counter, a configuration is adopted in which an ending performance (END2 performance in the first embodiment) is executed before the end of the state B so as to prevent the amusement of the game from being diminished due to the abrupt end of the state B, so that the end of the state B can be grasped in advance. This operation will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of the operation when the MY counter reaches the upper limit in state B and ends.

In the operation example of FIG. 50, the initial state (first game) is RT2, and the AR flag and the state B flag are on. Also, as the number of games played in state B increases, the number of games that can be continued in state B decreases (step S1911 in FIG. 25). In the operation example of FIG. It is also assumed that the MY counter has increased to 2140 immediately before the first game. In addition, when the push order replay (condition device numbers 22 to 24) is internally won, the operation is performed according to the correct operation order, and the normal replay (either replay combination 1 or replay combination 2) is won. In this case, the value of the MY counter is not changed (Yes determination in step S1A01 in FIG. 26). In addition, when the press order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31) is internally won, the correct operation order is followed to win the bell (small win 23). In this case, the value of the MY counter is incremented by 10 (in step S1A03 of FIG. 26, the requested payout number is 13 and the number of inserted coins is 3).

First, in the first game (1000th game), the game progresses with an internal winning of the pushing order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31). In this game, when the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, in the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) executed after the process such as payout of medals, the MY counter update process is executed in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) (step S1903 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26). Here, since the player has won the pressing order bell, the value of the MY counter is incremented by 10, and the value becomes 2150 (step S1A03 in FIG. 26). When the value of the MY counter reaches 2150, the END2 flag is set to ON and the AR flag is set to OFF (steps S1A13, S1A15, and S1A17 in FIG. 26). After the END2 flag is set to ON, operation navigation is executed even if the AR flag is set to OFF (step S1321 in FIG. 19). Further, when the END2 flag is ON, processing such as subtraction of the number of AR remaining games is not executed (No determination in step S1211 of FIG. 18).

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes sets the effect data so that the END2 effect is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (second game) (step S3117 in FIG. 30, step S3213 in FIG. 31). FIG. 50 shows that the END2 effect starts from the second game. That is, the condition for starting the END2 effect is that the value of the MY counter is 2150 or more.

This END2 effect is a effect consisting of 25 scenes that continue until the state B ends. These scenes are configured to be switched each time the value of the MY counter increases by 10 (step S3315 in FIG. 32), and the entire END2 effect is executed over 25 games at the shortest (when the game in which the MY counter increases by 10 in the pressing order of the bell wins is continued 25 times). FIG. 50 shows that each scene of the END2 effect is switched every time the MY counter increases by 10 (the bell wins in the order of pressing). Also, when the value of the MY counter reaches 2400 or more, the value of the number of games that can be continued in state B is set to 0, and state B ends (Yes determination in step S1A11 in FIG. 26, step S1A19), but the END2 effect ends in conjunction with the end of state B. After that, FIG. 50 shows that the value of the MY counter has reached 2400, so that the state A is set and the normal effect is being executed.

In the example of FIG. 50, the final scene indicates the end of the AR, but if, for example, in the 38th game of FIG. 50, the player wins the push order replay instead of the push order bell, the state B continues in the 39th game and the last scene continues to be displayed, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, for example, in the execution of the last scene, when it is more certain that the value of the MY counter reaches the upper limit, such as by adding a content indicating the end of AR when an internal winning is made to the push-order bell, the content indicating the end of AR or state B may be displayed.

Also, depending on the number of games in which the bell is not internally won, the END2 effect may not progress and the interest in the game may decrease. In this case, the END2 performance may be terminated when the execution period of the END2 performance reaches the maximum number of games, or the last scene may be executed and the END2 performance may be terminated when the maximum number of games is reached. Also, the state B may be ended in accordance with the end of the END2 effect.

[Regarding the condition for ending state B and the ending effect (END1 effect and END2 effect)]
In the first embodiment, the number of continuous games reaching 1,500 and the MY counter reaching 2,400 are two conditions (end conditions) for ending the state B without continuing (regardless of the number of remaining AR games), and at the end of these conditions, the ending effects (END 1 effect and END 2 effect) are executed respectively. This configuration is an example of a configuration in which an ending effect is performed when ending an advantageous state, and the advantageous state may be one in which an operation condition such as the state B of the first embodiment is notified (for example, AT, ART), or a state that brings about an advantageous state for the player, such as a so-called bonus, chance zone, or specialized zone. Also, in the first embodiment, the slot machine is explained as an example, but for pachinko, for example, it may be in a state such as a jackpot or time saving.

In addition, the condition for ending an advantageous state and the condition for starting an ending effect may be a condition established by the number of games as described above, a condition established by a net increase in the number of winning cards, or a condition established by the number of times of operation navigation, the number of wins, or the number of times a small winning combination is won. Depending on these conditions, the execution period of the ending effect may be an indefinite period. For example, in the first embodiment, the END2 effect is executed based on the value of the MY counter, but since the change in the MY counter differs for each game, the execution period of the END2 effect is an undefined period.

In the first embodiment, the END1 effect starts based on the number of games in state B, and then state B ends based on the number of games in state B. Also, the END2 effect starts based on the value of the MY counter, and then the state B ends based on the value of the MY counter. As described above, in the first embodiment, the same type of variable is used in both the end condition of an advantageous state and the start condition of the corresponding ending effect. However, different variables may be used, such as starting a certain ending effect based on the value of the MY counter, and ending state B based on the lapse of a predetermined number of subsequent games. In this case, a predetermined number may be set so that the MY counter does not exceed the upper limit value (2400). At this time, when the MY counter does not reach the upper limit value (2400), the state B ends, but even with this configuration, gambling can be suppressed.

Also, the end timing of the ending effect does not necessarily have to coincide with the end of the advantageous state, and may be mixed. If the game ends with an advantageous state, the end of the advantageous state can be clearly grasped by the end of the ending effect.

In addition, although the content of the ending performance is different in the first embodiment, it may be the same, and further, when the execution period of the ending performance is changed according to the starting condition of the ending performance, the cause of the end of the advantageous state can be estimated by the difference in the execution period. In addition, as in the first embodiment, when the execution period of the ending effect is a combination of a fixed number of games (for example, the END1 effect) and a non-fixed number of games (for example, the END2 effect) according to the start condition of the ending effect, it is possible to guess the reason why the advantageous state ends due to the difference in the execution period of the ending effect.

Also, in the first embodiment, the number of games and the net increase in the number of acquired cards are used as switching conditions for switching between multiple scenes for the ending effects, but these conditions are not limited to these conditions, and can be used arbitrarily.

Also, in the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of scenes are switched for the ending effect, but the configuration may be such that an ending effect that is not divided into scenes is played.

[Regarding the timing at which the start conditions for the END1 effect and the END2 effect are met]
As described above, in the first embodiment, two kinds of ending performances are adopted, but depending on the situation, the condition for starting the END2 performance may be satisfied after the END1 performance is started, and if the END1 performance is interrupted and the END2 performance is executed at this time, there is a possibility that the player will be confused or the interest in the game will be reduced. From this point of view, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51(a), when the conditions for starting the END2 effect are established during execution of the END1 effect, the END1 effect is maintained without starting the END2 effect. FIG. 49 shows that the condition for starting the END2 effect is met during execution of the END1 effect (at the end of the fifth game), but the END1 effect is still being executed.

In addition, if the END1 performance is interrupted due to establishment of a termination condition (MY counter reaches 2400 in the first embodiment) corresponding to the END2 performance during the execution of the END1 performance, there is a risk that the player will be confused or the interest in the game will be reduced. In the first embodiment, the END1 effect is an effect that is executed over 20 games, and the END2 effect is an effect that is executed over 25 games or more. In this configuration, when the start condition of the END1 performance is established before the start condition of the END2 performance, as shown in FIG. 51(a), the end condition corresponding to the END2 performance (in the first embodiment, the MY counter reaches 2400) is not satisfied while the END1 performance is being executed, so the END1 performance can be executed until the end of the state B. In the example of FIG. 49 as well, when the condition for starting the END1 effect is satisfied (at the end of the fifth game) before the condition for starting the END2 effect, the end condition (MY counter is 2400) corresponding to the END2 effect is not satisfied when the END1 effect and the state B are ended.

In the first embodiment, the execution period of the END2 effect is an undefined period of time from when the MY counter reaches 2150 to when it reaches 2400 (shortest 25 games) (FIG. 51(a)). As for this execution period, for example, even if it is set to a fixed period such as after the MY counter reaches 2150 and until 25 games have passed, as shown in FIG. In this case, the state B may be terminated even if the MY counter has not reached 2400. FIG.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, when the condition for starting the END2 effect is established first and the END2 effect is executed, the END1 effect is not executed later (FIG. 32), but there is a case where the state B ends and the END2 effect ends when the number of games that can be continued in the state B becomes 0 (1500 games have passed in the state B) during the execution of the END2 effect. Here, similarly to the END1 effect, in order to prevent the END2 effect from being interrupted, the execution period of the END2 effect may be shorter than that of the END1 effect.

For example, in FIG. 51(b), the execution period of the END2 effect is set to 25 games, but this may be set to 15 games, which is shorter than the execution period of the END1 effect. FIG. In this configuration, as shown in FIG. 51(c), the END2 performance is maintained even if the condition for starting the END1 performance is satisfied while the END2 performance is being executed, and the end condition corresponding to the END1 performance is not satisfied, so the END2 performance can be executed until the end of the state B.例文帳に追加In this case, the state B may be terminated even if the MY counter has not reached 2400. FIG.

Further, for example, when the condition for starting the END2 performance is satisfied first, the condition that the state B ends after a predetermined number of games with the current value of the number of games that can be continued in the state B as the upper limit is separately added as an end condition corresponding to the END2 performance, and the END2 performance may be executed in a period with the predetermined number of games as the upper limit. In this case also, the END2 performance is maintained during the execution of the END2 performance even if the start condition of the END1 performance is satisfied, and the end condition (either the MY counter reaches 2400 or the predetermined number of games has passed) is satisfied before the end condition (the number of games that can be continued in the state B is 0) corresponding to the END1 performance is established, and the END2 performance can be executed until the end of the state B.例文帳に追加

In the above description, the execution period of the END1 performance and the END2 performance are different, but if the execution period of the END2 performance is set to the same period as the execution period of the END1 performance (for example, 20 games each), the ending performance can be executed until the end of the advantageous state by maintaining the ending performance executed earlier.

In the above explanation, confusion due to the other ending performance is prevented by maintaining the ending performance already executed when the starting condition of the other ending performance is satisfied during the execution of the ending performance for which the start condition is satisfied first among the two types of ending performance. Furthermore, by making the execution period of the ending performance already executed shorter than the execution period of the other ending performance, the end condition of the advantageous state corresponding to the other ending performance is not established during the already executed ending performance, and the already executed ending performance is executed until the end of the advantageous state. As for this constitution, it is sufficient that the already executed ending performance is finished before the completion condition of the advantageous state corresponding to the other ending performance is established, and the execution period of the other ending performance is not limited to the above example.

[About switching scenes in continuous production]
In the first embodiment, for example, when conditional device numbers 25 to 28 are won, a continuous effect may be executed when the predictive period comes (for example, the predictive effect in FIG. 38), and the continuous effect is used in various scenes without being limited to this configuration. Here, the ending effects in the operation examples of FIGS. 49 and 50 are effects in which a plurality of scenes are switched, but such a structure for switching a plurality of scenes can also be applied to other continuous effects. Hereinafter, switching conditions in such a continuous effect will be described with reference to the drawings. 52, 53, and 54 are diagrams showing an example of scene switching in the continuous effect A, which consists of five scenes. In these examples, the switching conditions are different for each scene.

FIG. 52 shows an example in which the continuous effect A is executed from the 3rd game to the 10th game triggered by internal winning in the second chance (condition device number 25) in the 2nd game. In this example, the switching conditions for each scene are set in terms of the number of games, starting from scene 1, 2 games, 2 games, 2 games, 1 game, 1 game. The final number of games is a condition for ending the final scene. FIG. 52 shows that the scene is switched to the next scene according to the progress of the number of games, and that the continuous effect A is executed over 8 games in total.

FIG. 53 shows an example in which the continuous effect A is executed from the 3rd game to the 10th game triggered by the internal winning of the weak cherry (condition device number 26) in the 2nd game. In this example, the switching conditions for each scene are set in terms of the number of games, which are 1 game, 1 game, 2 games, 3 games, and 1 game in order from scene 1 . The final number of games is a condition for ending the final scene. FIG. 53 shows that the scene is switched to the next scene according to the progress of the number of games, and that the continuous effect A is executed over 8 games in total.

FIG. 54 shows an example in which the continuous effect A is executed from the 3rd game to the 11th game when the strong cherry (condition device number 27) is internally won in the 2nd game. In this example, the switching condition for each scene is that the winning eyes (not winning a role) are stopped and displayed. It should be noted that, in the final scene, the condition for ending the continuous effect A is that the misaligned eyes are stopped and displayed. FIG. 53 shows that in the 5th, 6th, and 9th games, the replay (conditional device number 17) is won, so that the winning eye is not stopped and the scene cannot be switched. On the other hand, when the losing eye is stopped and displayed (the 3rd, 4th, 7th, 8th, and 11th games), it is indicated that the above switching condition is satisfied and the scene is switched to the next scene (the final scene is finished by switching to the next effect). In the example of FIG. 53, the continuous effect A is executed over nine games in total, but depending on the winning condition device, the effect over five games at the shortest is executed.

As described above, the examples of FIGS. 52 to 54 adopt a configuration in which the switching conditions are changed according to the difference in the execution trigger (the difference in condition devices in the examples of FIGS. 52 to 54) for continuous effects consisting of a plurality of scenes. Regarding this switching condition, in the above example, the scene is switched according to the number of games and the stop display (winning of the role), but the scene may be switched according to the number of wins, the internal winning role, or the passage of time.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration is adopted in which the continuous performance is executed based on the internal winning combination, but the continuous performance may be triggered by other conditions, not limited to the internal winning combination.

Also, in the above example, the configuration for switching in units of scenes has been described, but a configuration for switching in units (hereinafter referred to as "parts") that can be separated in an effect that switches after a certain number of games may be adopted. Also, the effect in each part may be repeatedly executed until it is switched, or the last scene may be displayed continuously, and the contents thereof are not limited. For example, in the example of FIG. 52, a part having a length corresponding to the number of games played in each scene is prepared, and this part is used in the same scene in the example of FIG. At this time, if the scene in FIG. 54 has a longer period than the scene in FIG. 52, the same part may be repeatedly executed.

As in the examples of FIGS. 52 to 54, when the same continuous effect is executed under different switching conditions depending on the situation, variation (contrast) can be added even to the same continuous effect. In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 52 to 54, the switching condition corresponds to the trigger (condition device) of the continuous effect, but it may be configured not to correspond. In addition, in the configuration in which the switching condition is associated with the opportunity for continuous performance, the opportunity for continuous performance can be grasped from the manner in which the continuous performance is switched, and the interest in the game may be improved.

In the examples of FIGS. 52 and 53, the number of games played in each scene is constant, but in the example of FIG. 54, the number of games played in each scene is not constant. When these configurations are combined, an unexpected action can be shown to a player who believes that a certain scene will be played for a fixed number of times, and it can be expected to improve the interest of the game.

<Second embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, an ending effect (END1 effect) that can be executed before reaching the upper limit number of games in the state B and an ending effect (END2 effect) that can be executed before reaching the upper limit of the net increase number of medals in the state B are provided, and furthermore, when one ending effect is being executed, the other ending effect is not executed.

The second embodiment described below employs two types of ending effects (END3 effect, END4 effect) regarding the end of state B instead of the END1 effect and END2 effect of the first embodiment. The second embodiment will be described below with respect to portions different from the first embodiment. Although the description of the parts common to the first embodiment will be omitted, the processing using the END1 flag and the END2 flag in the first embodiment will be appropriately read as the END3 flag or the END4 flag.

First, using FIG. 55, the details of the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) in the second embodiment will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 55, the state B update process in the second embodiment is obtained by replacing the processes of steps S1913 and S1915 in the state B update process (FIG. 25) of the first embodiment with steps S1914 and S1916, respectively. These processes will be described below.

In step S1914, it is determined whether or not the number of games that can be continued in state B is 10 or the value of the MY counter is greater than 2350. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1916; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1931.

In step S1916, the END3 flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1917.

Next, details of the MY counter update process (step S1903 in FIG. 55) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the MY counter update process (step S1903 in FIG. 55) in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 56, the MY counter update process in the second embodiment is obtained by replacing the processes of steps S1A13 and S1A15 in the MY counter update process (FIG. 26) of the first embodiment with the processes of steps S1A14 and S1A16, respectively, and replacing the END2 flag of the first embodiment with the END4 flag. These processes will be described below.

In step S1A14, it is determined whether or not the END4 flag is set to OFF and the value of the MY counter is 2150 or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A16; otherwise, the MY counter update process is terminated.

In step S1A16, the END4 flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1A17.

Details of the game state update command process (step S343 in FIG. 28(d)) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the game state update command process (step S343 in FIG. 28(d)) in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 57, the game state update command process in the second embodiment is obtained by changing steps S3115, S3117 and S3119 of the game state update command process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment to steps S3116, S3118 and S3120. These processes will be described below.

In step S3116, END effect setting processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3118, it is determined whether or not the END effect (one of END3 effect and END4 effect) has been set. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3120; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3121.

In step S3120, END effect update processing is executed. In this process, the process of updating the display contents (for example, the display of the MY counter, the number of games that can be continued in state B) according to the progress of the game is executed for the END effect being executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S3121.

Next, details of the END effect setting process (step S3116) in the game state update command process of FIG. 57 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the END effect setting process (step S3116) in FIG.

First, in step S3401 executed first, it is determined whether or not the END3 effect is being set. If this condition is satisfied, the END effect setting process is terminated, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3403.

In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the END4 effect is being set. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3415; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3405, it is determined whether or not the END4 flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3407; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3415.

In step S3407, END4 effect is set, and the process proceeds to step S3409.

In step S3409, it is determined whether or not there is a high possibility that the value of the MY counter will reach 2400. In the second embodiment, the value of the number of games that can be continued in the current state B is multiplied by the average net increase number per game, and when the value obtained by adding the value of the MY counter to that value exceeds 2400, it is determined that the value of the MY counter is highly likely to reach 2400. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3411; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3413.

In step S3411, a process for displaying a fraction whose denominator is "2400" and whose numerator is the value of the MY counter is executed, and the flow advances to step S3415.

In step S3413, processing for displaying the value of the MY counter is executed, and the flow advances to step S3415.

In step S3415, it is determined whether or not the END3 flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3417, and if not, the END effect setting process is terminated.

In step S3417, END3 effect is set, and the process proceeds to step S3419.

In step S3419, it is determined whether or not there is a high possibility that the value of the MY counter will reach 2400. It should be noted that the determination is performed here by the same processing as in step S3409. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3421; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3423.

In step S3421, a process for displaying a fraction with the denominator being "2400" and the numerator being the value of the MY counter is executed, and the END effect setting process ends.

In step S3423, a process for displaying the value of the number of games that can be continued in state B and the value of the MY counter is executed, and the END effect setting process ends. When the END4 effect is executed first and the value of the MY counter is displayed as a fraction with "2400" as the denominator, the display setting for this fraction is cleared.

<<Description of operation>>
The features of the above-described second embodiment will be described below using an operation example.

[Example of operation at the end of state B (second embodiment)]
In the second embodiment, the number of AR remaining games is added as in the first embodiment, so that the period of state B in which medals are easily obtained may be prolonged. For this reason, in order to prevent the gambling nature from becoming too high, an upper limit is set for the number of games in state B and the number of net increase in medals (for example, the number of games is 1500 and the number of net increase is 2400) as in the first embodiment, and the state B is terminated when these upper limits are reached.

Furthermore, if the state B is suddenly terminated due to reaching the upper limit, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is reduced, so a configuration is adopted in which the end of the state B is grasped in advance by executing the ending performance (END3 performance in the second embodiment) before the end of the state B.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the number of games that can be continued in state B is 10 (10 games remaining to the upper limit of the number of games) or the value of the MY counter exceeds 2350 (50 remaining to the upper limit of the net increase), the END3 effect is executed (Yes in step S1914 of FIG. 55, and Yes in step S3415 of FIG. 58).

As described above, the END3 effect may be executed when the execution condition based on the number of games is satisfied, or when the execution condition based on the net increase in the number of games is satisfied, and the END3 effect is always executed before either upper limit is reached. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, apart from the END3 effect, an END4 effect is provided that is executed when an execution condition based on the net increase in the number of coins is satisfied. These END3 effect and END4 effect are common in that they both have an execution condition based on the net increase number, but differ in that the execution condition of the END4 effect is satisfied before the execution condition of the END3 effect. Specifically, the END4 effect is executed when the value of the MY counter is 2150 or more (250 or less remaining to the net increase number upper limit) (Yes in step S1A14 of FIG. 56, and Yes in step S3405 of FIG. 58). Depending on the difference in these execution conditions, there are cases where the END4 effect and the END3 effect are continuously executed, and where the END4 effect is not executed and the END3 effect is executed. Examples of these operations will be described below.

[Operation Example (E1): When END4 effect and END3 effect are executed consecutively (1)]
An operation example in which the END4 effect and the END3 effect are successively executed will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of the operation when the END4 effect and the END3 effect are continuously executed. In the following figures, in the item "number of games", the period from the start operation of the game (operation of the start lever 135) to the start operation of the next game is shown as one game period. Also, the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective and the timing at which all the reels are stopped within the period of one game are indicated by short vertical lines.

In the operation example of FIG. 59, the state of the first game is RT2, and the AR flag and the state B flag are on. As the number of games played in state B increases, the number of games that can be continued in state B decreases (step S1911 in FIG. 25). In the operation example of FIG. It is also assumed that the MY counter has increased to 2140 immediately before the first game. In addition, when the push order replay (condition device numbers 22 to 24) is internally won, the operation is performed according to the correct operation order, and the normal replay (either replay combination 1 or replay combination 2) is won. In addition, when the press order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31) is internally won, the correct operation order is followed to win the bell (small win 23). In this case, the value of the MY counter is incremented by 10 (at step S1A03 in FIG. 56, the requested payout number is 13 and the inserted number is 3).

First, in the first game (1251st time), the game progresses by internally winning the pressing order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31). In this game, when the reels 110 to 112 stop, in the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) executed after the process such as payout of medals, the MY counter update process is executed in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) (step S1903 in FIG. 55, FIG. 56). Here, since the player has won the pressing order bell, the value of the MY counter is incremented by 10, and the value becomes 2150 (step S1A03 in FIG. 56). When the value of the MY counter reaches 2150, the END4 flag is set to ON and the AR flag is set to OFF (steps S1A14, S1A16 and S1A17 in FIG. 56). After the END4 flag is set to ON, operation navigation is executed even if the AR flag is set to OFF (step S1321 in FIG. 19). Further, when the END4 flag is ON, processing such as subtraction of the number of AR remaining games is not executed (No determination in step S1211 of FIG. 18). Furthermore, in the state B update process, 1 is subtracted from the number of games that can be continued in state B after the MY counter update process, and the value becomes 249 (step S1911 in FIG. 55).

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes sets the effect data so that the END4 effect is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (second game) (step S3116 in FIG. 57, step S3407 in FIG. 58). FIG. 59 shows that the END4 effect starts from the second game. That is, the condition for starting the END4 effect is that the value of the MY counter is 2150 or more.

Also, when setting the effect data for the END4 effect, it is determined whether or not there is a high possibility that the value of the MY counter will reach 2400 (step S3409 in FIG. 58). Here, the product of 249, which is the number of games that can be continued in state B, and 3, which is the average net increase in the AR state, is 747. Adding the current MY counter value of 2150 results in 2897, which exceeds 2400. Therefore, it is determined that there is a high possibility that the MY counter value will reach 2400. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59, the value of the MY counter is displayed in the END4 effect in a fractional format with the denominator being "2400" and the numerator being the value of the MY counter (step S3411 in FIG. 58).

After that, the game progresses while the END4 effect is being executed, and the value of the number of games that can be continued in state B is 150 and the value of the MY counter is 2350 just before the 101st game (1351st game). Then, in the 101st game, the game progresses with an internal winning of the pressing order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31). In this game, when the reels 110 to 112 stop, in the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) executed after the process such as payout of medals, the MY counter update process is executed in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) (step S1903 in FIG. 55, FIG. 56). Here, since the player has won the pressing order bell, the value of the MY counter is incremented by 10, and the value becomes 2360 (step S1A03 in FIG. 56). Furthermore, in the state B update process, 1 is subtracted from the number of games that can be continued in state B after the MY counter update process, and the value becomes 149 (step S1911 in FIG. 55). Then, when the value of the MY counter exceeds 2350, the END3 flag is set to ON and the AR flag is set to OFF (steps S1914, S1916 and S1917 in FIG. 55). After the END3 flag is set to ON, operation navigation is executed even if the AR flag is set to OFF (step S1321 in FIG. 19). Further, when the END3 flag is ON, processing such as subtraction of the number of AR remaining games is not executed (No determination in step S1211 of FIG. 18).

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes sets the effect data so that the END3 effect is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (102nd game) (step S3116 in FIG. 57, step S3417 in FIG. 58). FIG. 59 shows that the END3 effect starts from the 102nd game. That is, one of the conditions for starting the END3 effect is that the value of the MY counter exceeds 2350.

Also, when setting the effect data for the END3 effect, it is determined whether or not there is a high possibility that the value of the MY counter will reach 2400 (step S3419 in FIG. 58). Here, the product of 149, which is the number of games that can be continued in state B, and 3, which is the average net increase number in the AR state, is 447. Adding the current MY counter value of 2360 results in 2807, which exceeds 2400. Therefore, it is determined that there is a high possibility that the MY counter value will reach 2400. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59, the value of the MY counter is displayed in the END3 effect in a fraction format with the denominator being "2400" and the numerator being the value of the MY counter (step S3421 in FIG. 58).

After that, it is assumed that the game progresses while the END3 effect is being executed, and the value of the MY counter reaches 2400 at the end of the 105th game (1355th game). In this case, the value of the number of games that can be continued in state B is set to 0, and state B ends (Yes determination in step S1A11 in FIG. 56, step S1A19), but the END3 effect ends when state B ends. After that, FIG. 59 shows that the value of the MY counter has reached 2400, state A is set, and the normal effect is being executed.

[Operation Example (E2): When END4 effect and END3 effect are executed consecutively (2)]
An operation example in which the END4 effect and the END3 effect are successively executed will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of the operation when the END4 effect and the END3 effect are continuously executed. In the following figures, in the item "number of games", the period from the start operation of the game (operation of the start lever 135) to the start operation of the next game is shown as one game period. Also, the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective and the timing at which all the reels are stopped within the period of one game are indicated by short vertical lines.

In the operation example of FIG. 60, the state of the first game is RT2, and the AR flag and the state B flag are on. Also, as the number of games played in state B increases, the number of games that can be continued in state B decreases (step S1911 in FIG. 25). In the operation example of FIG. It is also assumed that the MY counter has increased to 2140 immediately before the first game. In addition, when the push order replay (condition device numbers 22 to 24) is internally won, the operation is performed according to the correct operation order, and the normal replay (either replay combination 1 or replay combination 2) is won. In addition, when the press order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31) is internally won, the correct operation order is followed to win the bell (small win 23). In this case, the value of the MY counter is incremented by 10 (at step S1A03 in FIG. 56, the requested payout number is 13 and the inserted number is 3).

First, in the first game (1451st time), the game progresses with an internal winning of the pushing order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31). In this game, when the reels 110 to 112 stop, in the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) executed after the process such as payout of medals, the MY counter update process is executed in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) (step S1903 in FIG. 55, FIG. 56). Here, since the player has won the pressing order bell, the value of the MY counter is incremented by 10, and the value becomes 2150 (step S1A03 in FIG. 56). When the value of the MY counter reaches 2150, the END4 flag is set to ON and the AR flag is set to OFF (steps S1A14, S1A16 and S1A17 in FIG. 56). After the END4 flag is set to ON, operation navigation is executed even if the AR flag is set to OFF (step S1321 in FIG. 19). Further, when the END4 flag is ON, processing such as subtraction of the number of AR remaining games is not executed (No determination in step S1211 of FIG. 18). Furthermore, in the state B update process, 1 is subtracted from the number of games that can be continued in state B after the MY counter update process, and the value becomes 49 (step S1911 in FIG. 55).

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes sets the effect data so that the END4 effect is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (second game) (step S3116 in FIG. 57, step S3407 in FIG. 58). FIG. 60 shows that the END4 effect starts from the second game. That is, the condition for starting the END4 effect is that the value of the MY counter is 2150 or more.

Also, when setting the effect data for the END4 effect, it is determined whether or not there is a high possibility that the value of the MY counter will reach 2400 (step S3409 in FIG. 58). Here, the product of 49, which is the number of games that can be continued in state B, and 3, which is the average net increase in the AR state, is 147, and when the current MY counter value of 2150 is added to this, the result is 2297, which does not exceed 2400. Therefore, it is determined that the MY counter value is unlikely to reach 2400. As a result, as shown in FIG. 60, the value of the MY counter is displayed as it is in the END4 effect (step S3413 in FIG. 58).

After that, the game progresses while the END4 effect is being executed, and the value of the number of games that can be continued in state B is 11 and the value of the MY counter is 2250 just before the 40th game (1490th game). Then, in the 40th game, the game progresses with an internal winning of the pressing order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31). In this game, when the reels 110 to 112 stop, in the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) executed after the process such as payout of medals, the MY counter update process is executed in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) (step S1903 in FIG. 55, FIG. 56). Here, since the player has won the pressing order bell, the value of the MY counter is incremented by 10 and the value becomes 2260 (step S1A03 in FIG. 56). Furthermore, in the state B update process, 1 is subtracted from the number of games that can be continued in state B after the MY counter update process, and the value becomes 10 (step S1911 in FIG. 55). When the number of games that can be continued in state B reaches 10, the END3 flag is set to ON and the AR flag is set to OFF (steps S1914, S1916, and S1917 in FIG. 55). After the END3 flag is set to ON, operation navigation is executed even if the AR flag is set to OFF (step S1321 in FIG. 19). Further, when the END3 flag is ON, processing such as subtraction of the number of AR remaining games is not executed (No determination in step S1211 of FIG. 18).

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes sets the effect data so that the END3 effect is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (41st game) (step S3116 in FIG. 57, step S3417 in FIG. 58). FIG. 60 shows that the END3 effect starts from the 41st game. That is, one of the conditions for starting the END3 effect is that the value of the number of games that can be continued in the state B becomes 10.

Also, when setting the effect data for the END3 effect, it is determined whether or not there is a high possibility that the value of the MY counter will reach 2400 (step S3419 in FIG. 58). Here, the product of 10, which is the number of games that can be continued in the state B, and 3, which is the average net increase in the AR state, is 30. Adding the current MY counter value of 2260 results in 2290, which does not exceed 2400. Therefore, it is determined that the MY counter value is unlikely to reach 2400. As a result, as shown in FIG. 60, the value of the MY counter is displayed as it is in the END3 effect, and the value of the number of games that can be continued in state B is also displayed (step S3423 in FIG. 58).

Thereafter, the game progresses while the END3 effect is being executed, and when the number of games that can be continued in state B becomes 0 or the value of the MY counter reaches 2400, the value of the number of games that can be continued in state B is set to 0, state B ends, and state A is set (Yes judgment in step S1A11 in FIG. 56, step S1A19 in FIG. 56, No judgment in step S1905 in FIG. 55). When the state B ends, the END3 effect ends accordingly, and the normal effect is executed according to the setting of the state A.

[Operation example (E3): When END3 effect is executed without executing END4 effect]
An operation example in which the END3 effect is executed without executing the END4 effect will be described below with reference to FIG. This figure shows an example of the operation when the END3 effect is executed without the END4 effect being executed. In the following figures, in the item "number of games", the period from the start operation of the game (operation of the start lever 135) to the start operation of the next game is shown as one game period. Also, the timing at which the stop operation becomes effective and the timing at which all the reels are stopped within the period of one game are indicated by short vertical lines.

In the operation example of FIG. 61, the state of the first game is RT2, and the AR flag and the state B flag are on. Also, as the number of games played in state B increases, the number of games that can be continued in state B decreases (step S1911 in FIG. 25). In the operation example of FIG. It is also assumed that the MY counter has increased to 1500 immediately before the first game. In addition, when the push order replay (condition device numbers 22 to 24) is internally won, the operation is performed according to the correct operation order, and the normal replay (either replay combination 1 or replay combination 2) is won. In addition, when the press order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31) is internally won, the correct operation order is followed to win the bell (small win 23). In this case, the value of the MY counter is incremented by 10 (at step S1A03 in FIG. 56, the requested payout number is 13 and the inserted number is 3).

First, in the first game (1489th time), the game progresses by internally winning the pressing order bell (condition device numbers 29 to 31). In this game, when the reels 110 to 112 stop, in the game state update process (step S121 in FIG. 15) executed after the process such as payout of medals, the MY counter update process is executed in the state B update process (step S1423 in FIG. 20) (step S1903 in FIG. 55, FIG. 56). Here, since the player has won the bell in the pressing order, the value of the MY counter is incremented by 10, and the value becomes 1510 (step S1A03 in FIG. 56). Further, in the state B update process, 1 is subtracted from the number of games that can be continued in state B after the MY counter update process, and the value becomes 11 (step S1911 in FIG. 55). At this point, the END4 effect start condition (the value of the MY counter is 2150) is not satisfied, so the END4 effect is not executed.

In the following second game (1490th game), as in the first game, the push-order bell (conditional device numbers 29 to 31) is internally won and the game progresses. When the number of games that can be continued in state B reaches 10, the END3 flag is set to ON and the AR flag is set to OFF (steps S1914, S1916, and S1917 in FIG. 55). After the END3 flag is set to ON, operation navigation is executed even if the AR flag is set to OFF (step S1321 in FIG. 19). Further, when the END3 flag is ON, processing such as subtraction of the number of AR remaining games is not executed (No determination in step S1211 of FIG. 18).

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the game state update command after these processes sets the effect data so that the END3 effect is started at the timing of the start operation of the next game (third game) (step S3116 in FIG. 57, step S3417 in FIG. 58). FIG. 61 shows that the END3 effect starts from the third game. That is, one of the conditions for starting the END3 effect is that the value of the number of games that can be continued in the state B becomes 10.

Also, when setting the effect data for the END3 effect, it is determined whether or not there is a high possibility that the value of the MY counter will reach 2400 (step S3419 in FIG. 58). Here, the product of 10, which is the number of games that can be continued in state B, and 3, which is the average net increase in the AR state, is 30, and when the current MY counter value of 1520 is added to this, the result is 1550, which does not exceed 2400. Therefore, it is determined that the MY counter value is unlikely to reach 2400. As a result, as shown in FIG. 61, the value of the MY counter is displayed as it is in the END3 effect, and the value of the number of games that can be continued in state B is also displayed (step S3423 in FIG. 58).

After that, it is assumed that the game progresses while the END3 effect is being executed, and the value of the number of games that can be continued in the state B becomes 0 at the end of the 12th game (1500th game). In this case, state B ends and state A is set (No determination in step S1905 in FIG. 55). In FIG. 61, it is shown that the END3 effect is finished in accordance with the end of this state B. FIG. After that, FIG. 61 shows that the normal effect is executed in accordance with the setting of the state A.

[Regarding forced termination conditions and ending effect (END3 effect and END4 effect) of state B]
The above-described second embodiment adopts a configuration in which the number of continuous games reaching 1500 and the MY counter reaching 2400 are two conditions (forcible termination conditions) that end state B without continuing (regardless of the number of AR remaining games), and two types of ending effects (END3 effects and END4 effects (FIGS. 59 to 61, operation examples (E1) to (E3)) are executed just before these forced termination conditions are met. In this second embodiment, when the END3 effect is executed, the state B is continued until the forced end condition is satisfied, and even when the END4 effect is executed, the state B is continued until the forced end condition is satisfied, and the state B is switched to the END3 effect until the forced end condition is satisfied. It has a configuration that confirms the flow that B ends.With this configuration, the END3 effect and the END4 effect play a role of suggesting that state B ends due to the forced end condition, and these effects make it possible to grasp that state B ends due to the forced end condition.Note that if the END4 effect start condition is satisfied before the END3 effect start condition, the END4 effect is executed, but in this END4 effect, the END3 effect start condition is satisfied. When the same condition is satisfied, the END4 effect is switched to the END3 effect (FIGS. 59 and 60, operation examples (E1) and (E2)).On the other hand, when the END3 effect start condition is satisfied before the END4 effect start condition, the END3 effect is executed, but even if the END4 effect start condition is satisfied later, the END4 effect is not executed (Yes in step S3401 of FIG. 58). The END4 effect start condition may be a condition that may be satisfied before the END3 effect start condition, and may be a condition that is always satisfied before the END3 effect start condition.When the END4 effect start condition is satisfied before the END3 effect start condition, the END4 effect is executed first, and after that, the END3 effect start condition is satisfied and the END3 effect is executed, and then the state B ends due to the forced end condition.At this time, END4. From the effect, it can be grasped that the state B is terminated by the forced end condition before the END3 effect is executed. Also, when the END3 effect is executed, it can be grasped that the state B will soon end due to the forced end condition.

Note that unlike the second embodiment, the END4 effect may be executed when the END4 effect start condition is satisfied while the END3 effect is being executed. If this configuration is adopted, the END3 effect may be executed before or after the END4 effect. In this configuration, for example, a player who thinks that ``the period from the execution of the END3 performance to the end of the state B is shorter than the period from the execution of the END4 performance to the end of the state B'' due to the execution of the END3 performance after the END4 performance may be confused by the execution of the END4 performance after the END3 performance, or misunderstand that the period to the end of the state B is lengthened by the execution of the END4 performance. Such a problem can be prevented by adopting a configuration in which the END4 effect is not executed even if the END4 effect start condition is satisfied during the execution of the END3 effect as in the second embodiment.

In the second embodiment, there are two forced termination conditions for the state B, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and even if only one forced termination condition is adopted, the configuration for executing the END3 effect or the END4 effect can be applied. As an example of such a configuration, there is a configuration in which the forced termination condition of the second embodiment excludes the net increase number of games, and only the state B continuous game number is used, and the net increase number is excluded from the END3 effect start condition, and the state B continuous game number is the only condition. In this example as well, when the END3 effect start condition is satisfied, the END3 effect is executed, and the state B is terminated by the forced end condition. In addition, there is a case where the END4 performance start condition is satisfied before the END3 performance start condition, and in this case, as in the second embodiment, the END4 performance is executed first, and after the END3 performance start condition is satisfied and the END3 performance is executed, the state B is terminated by the forced end condition.

As in the second embodiment, by setting the END4 performance start condition to a condition using a value of the same kind as the value used in one of a plurality of forced termination conditions, it is possible to guess which forced termination condition is satisfied depending on whether the END4 performance is executed or not.

In the second embodiment, the upper limit of the number of continuous games (1500) and the upper limit of the number of net increases (MY counter is 2400) are used as conditions for forced termination of state B. However, the conditions for forced termination are not limited to these, and conditions relating to the number of games, the number of acquired cards, or the number of payouts can be employed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the value of the number of continuous games (1490) through which the upper limit of the number of continuous games is reached (1500), which is one of the conditions for forced termination of state B, is used as the END3 effect start condition. In addition, for the upper limit of the number of net increase (MY counter is 2400) which is another forced end condition of the state B, the value of the number of net increase (MY counter is 2350) through which this value is reached is used as the condition for starting the END3 effect. As a result, the END3 effect can be executed before the state B ends at either the upper limit of the number of continuous games or the upper limit of the net increase number. In the second embodiment, the same value as the value used for the condition for forced termination of state B is used as the condition for starting the END3 effect.

In the second embodiment, the value of the number of net increase (MY counter is 2150) is used as the END4 effect start condition, but for example, the number of continuous games in state B may be used, or a plurality of start conditions such as the END3 effect start condition may be provided. Alternatively, the start condition may be satisfied at the expected time of arrival, instead of the current value of the net increase in the number of sheets. For example, when the net increase in the AR state is 3, the MY counter value is 1500, and the number of AR remaining games is 220, there is a high possibility that the MY counter value will reach 2150 (1500+220×3=2160) before reaching the upper limit of the number of continuous games in state B at this point, so the END4 effect may be started at this point. In the second embodiment, the AR state is managed by the number of remaining AR games, but even when the AR state is managed by the number of operations navigation, the possibility of the MY counter value reaching 2150 is similarly determined, and the END4 effect can be started. A similar configuration can also be used when the AR state is managed by the net increase number (difference number), but in this case, it can be easily determined that the value of the MY counter reaches 2150 from the value of the obtainable net increase number.

When the END4 performance or the END3 performance is executed, if it is determined that the MY counter reaches the upper limit and the state B ends, even if the operation navigation is missed, the state B continues until the net increase number reaches the upper limit, so that the player is not disadvantaged. However, in the second embodiment, the state B may end when the upper limit of the number of continuous games in the state B is reached, so this case may be disadvantageous. In the second embodiment, there is a high possibility that the MY counter reaches the upper limit when the END4 effect is executed, compared to when the END4 effect is not executed, so that anxiety about operation mistakes can be alleviated in some cases.

In addition, when the net increase number (difference number) as in the second embodiment is used as the END4 effect start condition, the presence or absence of execution of the END4 effect changes depending on the medal acquisition status, so that the player may be able to grasp the acquisition status. Also, the same effect can be obtained when the payout number is used instead of the net increase number. Also, the condition for starting the END4 effect may be a condition relating to the number of rights (the number of sets or the number of games) relating to state B, and may be a condition that is satisfied when the number of ownership (or the number of consumption) of the number of rights is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. When such a constitution is adopted, the END4 performance can be executed at the time when the acquisition of medals is expected, and the END4 performance can be executed at an earlier stage than the constitution executed based on the actual number of medals acquired. As such a configuration, the END4 effect start condition is that the number of AT sets or the number of AT games is a certain number or more, or the current acquisition number is ◯ and the number of AT sets or AT games is a certain number or more. Further, the END4 effect start condition is that a predetermined number of AT games (eg, 300 games) is consumed, or that a predetermined number of AT sets (eg, 20 sets) is consumed.

Moreover, a case where the condition for starting the END4 effect is satisfied by lottery (for example, winning with a probability of 1/16384) may be added to the conditions for starting the END4 effect.

[About the contents of the ending production (END3 production and END4 production)]
The above-described second embodiment adopts a configuration in which the number of continuous games reaches 1500 and the MY counter reaches 2400 as two conditions (forcible termination conditions) to end state B without continuing (regardless of the number of remaining AR games), and two types of ending effects (END3 effects and END4 effects (FIGS. 59 to 61, operation examples (E1) to (E3)) are executed just before these forced termination conditions are met. In this second embodiment, when the ending effect (END3 effect, END4 effect) is executed, the state B is continued until the forced end condition is satisfied.That is, when the END3 effect start condition or the END4 effect start condition is satisfied, the respective ending effect is executed, and then the forced end condition is satisfied to end the state B.That is, the ending effect (END3 effect, END4 effect) is the state B forced. It is an effect suggesting that the game will be terminated by the termination condition, and it is possible to let the user know that the state B will be terminated by the forced termination condition.

In the second embodiment, when setting the ending effect, it is determined whether or not the condition that the value of the MY counter reaches 2400, which is one of the forced termination conditions, is likely to be satisfied in state B (steps S3409 and S3419 in FIG. 58). A configuration is adopted in which the information is displayed as it is (steps S3413 and S3423 in FIG. 58). With this configuration, it is possible to let the player know the type of forced termination condition that is likely to be satisfied, depending on whether or not the fraction format is displayed in the ending effect. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the second embodiment, and in a configuration in which a forced termination condition regarding the number of game media acquired and a forced termination condition regarding the number of games are provided, the possibility that one of the forced termination conditions is satisfied is estimated, and a difference is provided in the display content of the ending effect according to the result. As described above, any aspect of providing a difference in display can be adopted.

As in the second embodiment, one of the forced termination conditions is the upper limit of the number of net increase (difference number), and when adopting a configuration in which the display of the ending effect is changed depending on the possibility that the forced end condition is satisfied, the expectation that the maximum profit can be obtained can be enhanced by displaying the ending effect. In particular, in the second embodiment, the value of the MY counter related to the number of net additions is displayed, and when the possibility of reaching the upper limit of the number of net additions is high, the upper limit value is displayed, so the sense of expectation can be further heightened. Since the MY counter is reset to 0 once it turns negative, there are cases where the total number of net increases in state B is reflected, and there are cases where part of the number of net additions is reflected. In addition, the configuration is not limited to directly displaying a value such as the MY counter. For example, the configuration may be such that the upper limit of the number of net increases and the current number of net increases are displayed using a meter, respectively.

Further, in the above configuration, the condition for starting the ending effect may be a condition related to the number of rights (number of sets or number of games) related to state B, and the condition may be satisfied when the number of ownership (or the number of consumption) of this number of rights is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. When such a configuration is adopted, the ending performance can be executed at the time when the acquisition of medals is expected, and the ending performance can be executed at an earlier stage than the configuration executed based on the actual number of medals acquired. As such a configuration, there is a configuration in which the condition for starting the ending effect is that the number of AT sets and/or the number of AT games is equal to or greater than a certain number, and that the condition is that the current acquired number is ◯ and the number of AT sets and/or AT games is equal to or greater than a certain number. Further, the END4 effect start condition is that a predetermined number of AT games (eg, 300 games) is consumed, or that a predetermined number of AT sets (eg, 20 sets) is consumed.

Further, with respect to the conditions for starting the ending effect, a case where the condition for starting the ending effect is satisfied by lottery (for example, winning with a probability of 1/16384) may be added.

In the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a high possibility of reaching the upper limit of the net increase number when setting each of the END3 effect and the END4 effect. In addition, when the END3 performance is executed in a state where the END4 performance is not executed, the possibility of reaching the upper limit of the net increase number is low, so in this case, the display in the fraction format may not be performed. In the second embodiment, the number of games that can be continued in state B is not displayed when the fraction format is displayed in the END3 effect, but in this case, the number of games that can be continued in state B may be displayed. In this case, when the state B reaches either the upper limit of the number of net additions or the upper limit of the number of continuous games, the state B ends even if the other value does not reach the upper limit, but since it is close to the upper limit of the number of net additions, the player can be satisfied and enjoy which of the forced termination conditions will end the state B.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the value obtained by multiplying the current number of games that can be continued in state B by the average net increase number per game, and adding the value of the MY counter to that value exceeds 2400, it is determined that the value of the MY counter is likely to reach 2400 (the upper limit of the net increase number).

[Modification of Second Embodiment]
In the above description of the second embodiment, the conditions for starting the END4 effect are that the MY counter reaches or is expected to reach 2150, and that the number of possessions (or consumption) of the number of rights (the number of sets or the number of games) relating to state B is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. However, the timing of judging these conditions may be limited to the timing at which conditions such as the number of consecutive AT sets (or the number of possible consecutive wins), the internal winning or winning of a predetermined minor winning combination, and the addition based on such conditions are satisfied. . If it is determined at such timing whether or not the END4 effect start condition is satisfied based on the net increase number and the number of continuous games, various conditions can be adopted according to the game characteristics.

In the second embodiment, the net increase number is displayed in the END3 effect. However, if the net increase number is small (for example, 1000 or less), the net increase number may not be displayed.

In the first embodiment, an example of adopting an ending effect consisting of a plurality of scenes was explained, but in the second embodiment as well, both or one of the END3 effect and the END4 effect may be effected by a plurality of scenes, or may be effected without scene switching. The conditions for scene switching may be changed according to the conditions for starting the ending effect. At this time, the same value may be used for both conditions (for example, both conditions may be determined based on the value of the MY counter), or different types of values may be used.

The second embodiment is an example of a configuration in which an ending effect is performed when the state B ends with a forced end condition, but this advantageous state may be one in which an operation condition such as the state B of the second embodiment is notified (for example, AT, ART), or a state that brings a state advantageous to the player, such as a so-called bonus, chance zone, or specialized zone. In the second embodiment, a slot machine is explained as an example, but for pachinko, for example, it may be in a state such as a jackpot or time saving.

<Third embodiment>
A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

62 to 122 are used for the explanation of the third embodiment, and even if overlapping symbols are used in the first and second embodiments, the symbols shown in FIGS. 62 to 122 are given priority in the explanation of the third embodiment.

In the slot machine according to the third embodiment, which will be described below, a plurality of reels loaded with a predetermined number of game media and having a plurality of types of symbols on them start to rotate when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is determined by lottery. If a condition determined by the condition matches a predetermined payout condition, the game medium is put out and the game is finished, and if the condition is not met, the game is finished without putting out the game medium.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. FIG. 62 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of winning lines.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 62 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front side of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) having a plurality of types of patterns arranged on the outer peripheral surface are accommodated in the center inside (not shown) of the main body 101, and are configured to be rotatable inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the third embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-like members at regular intervals, and the strip-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three times in the vertical direction from the display window 113 when viewed from the player, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. 63, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 in the figure) is the left reel upper stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the figure) is the left reel middle stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) is the left reel lower stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure) is the middle reel upper stage symbol. , the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 111 (position 5 in the figure) is the middle reel symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom stage of the middle reel 111 (position 8 in the figure) is the middle reel bottom stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the top stage of the right reel 112 (position 3 in the figure) is the right reel top stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 6 in the figure) is the right reel middle stage symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 6 in the figure) is the right reel middle stage symbol, and the symbol displayed on the bottom stage of the middle reel 111 (position 8 in the figure) The symbols displayed at position 9 shown) are called right reel bottom symbols, and each symbol of each reel 110 to 112 is vertically displayed three times on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the third embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating each pattern displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. An optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100, and a light blocking piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the optical sensor. Based on the detection result of the optical sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotation direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination described later with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68 is displayed. In the third embodiment, a middle winning line L1 composed of left reel middle symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel middle symbols is provided. FIG. 63 shows this winning line L1. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 of the third embodiment requires three medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than this number, none of the winning lines become effective, and when this number of inserted medals is betted, the winning line L1 becomes effective. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135 . Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle pay line L1, a right-down pay line composed of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, or a right-increasing pay line composed of left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols may be set as valid pay lines, and the number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, BB1, BB2, RB) has been internally won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, or that the player is in the RB state or BB state, which will be described later. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp for notifying the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay role (details will be described later) which is one of the winning roles in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The state B in-state lamp 190 is a lamp indicating that state B, which will be described later, is set. The lamp 190 during state B is always lit when state B is set and operation navigation occurs, and once lit, it remains lit until state B ends. In the state in which the state B is set and before operation navigation occurs, the light may be turned on at any timing. In the third embodiment, the light is turned on when the AR preparation state (the AR preparation flag is turned on) is reached, and the light is turned off when the state B ends (step S1821 in FIG. 88).

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In the third embodiment, one card is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game start lamp 121 for notifying that the game start operation is possible is lit.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following description, it may be expressed as “given to the player” in the same sense as “payout to the player”. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112 . That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137 , a middle stop button 138 and a right stop button 139 . The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. Also, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations will be referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel, respectively. Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order or pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet, and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 to the outside is provided on the upper part of the production device 160. - 特許庁The effect device 160 is provided with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed on the slot machine 1. It has a structure that appears in front of 00 (player side, front side). In addition to the liquid crystal display device, any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information may be used. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen may be used. Also, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the screen is configured to be visible to the player. Although the display screen is rectangular in the case of the third embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in the case of the third embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

FIG. 64 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door opened. The housing 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242 and having an open front. Inside the housing 101, a main control board storage case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the rear plate 242. Below the main control board storage case 210, a reel unit 700 having three reels 110 to 112 is arranged. On the side of the main control board housing case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board housing case 220 containing the sub control board is arranged. Also, on the side plate 260 on the right side, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached which is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the lower surface plate 264, a power supply device 252 having a power supply board is arranged above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device. Furthermore, it has a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off.

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the housing 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the housing 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113, a production device 160, a production control board (not shown) for controlling the production device 160, and an upper speaker 272 are provided. Below the pattern display window 113, a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals or the like onto a medal tray 161 are provided. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145 .

Although not shown, the main control board is provided with a switch for enabling or disabling the stop function and a switch for enabling or disabling the automatic settlement function. The positions of these switches are not particularly limited, and may be provided on the sub-control board, may be provided separately from these boards, or may be provided in separate locations. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which a physical switch is provided. For example, a configuration in which it is possible to set whether or not to enable the stopping function and the automatic settlement function in a program for changing the setting values of the game machine, etc. may be used. In this case, these functions may be set using the start lever 135 and the stop buttons 137-139. When a physical switch is provided, a variable indicating the state of this switch is stored when the power is turned on, and processing for activating the stop function and automatic settlement function is executed based on this variable. Note that this variable is maintained unless the power is turned on again. In addition to the above switches, a stop release switch for releasing the stop is also provided.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control section of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control section 300 that controls the progress of a game, a first sub-control section 400 that controls main effects in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control section 300, and a second sub-control section 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control section 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification, so the data capacity of the ROM 306 and RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is limited.

《Main control unit》
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used in the internal lottery for the winning combination, reel pattern arrangement and stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling the input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watch dog timer) 314 are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz=1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 features a random number occurrence circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical values within the clock signal entered from the crystal oscillator 315a, and an activation signal output circuit 338 that outputs the startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU304 starts gaming control when the startup signal is entered from this activation signal output circuit 338 (starts the main control unit main treatment described later).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal reception sensor for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, payout from medal payout device 180 at each interrupt time. The state of the medal payout sensor of the medal to be played, the optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, the switch (if adopted) for activating the stop function and automatic settlement function, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316 . The random number generating circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the player's operation of the stop buttons.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, respectively, and detect an insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and become L level each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel rotates from the reference position from the time when it becomes L level until it becomes L level again is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 .

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives the motor provided in the medal payout device 180, various lamps 336 (the winning line display lamp 120, the notification lamp 123, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124, the replay lamp 122, and the state B lamp 19. 0, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start lamp 121, a stored number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating a game state) to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped to the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9v in the third embodiment).

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

《Sub-controller》
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 has a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling lighting patterns of the backlight, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.

Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control section 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 . The second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a plurality of control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various drive devices for effects (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-controller 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on this control command. is equipped with The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control section 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

《Pattern arrangement》
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the pattern arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. In addition, this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols provided on each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112).

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (20 frames numbered 0 to 19 in the third embodiment) of a plurality of types (nine types in the third embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure indicate the arrangement positions of symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112 . For example, in the third embodiment, the frame numbered 17 on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon pattern", the frame numbered 17 on the middle reel 111 has a "bell pattern", and the frame numbered 14 on the right reel 112 has a "seven 1 pattern".

The slot machine 100 in the third embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum withdrawal range (less than 5 frames in the third embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed in order to improve the interest of the game.

《Types of winning roles》
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 and 68 are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and payouts for each winning combination.

Winning hands of the slot machine 100 include replay hands 1-16 and small hands 1-19. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in the third embodiment, replayable combinations 1 to 16 are combinations that can be replayed without inserting new medals. The replay hands 1-16 are sometimes called "actuating hands". In addition, the “winning” in the third embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination that does not involve the payout of medals (the combination that does not involve the payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, and includes the winning of replay combinations 1 to 16, for example.

The re-playing hands 1 to 16 are prize-winning hands (operating hands) that can be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are as follows: Replay role 1 is "Replay-Replay-Replay", Replay role 2 is "Bell-Replay-Watermelon", Replay role 3 is "Replay-Replay-Seven 1", Replay role 4 is "Replay-Seven 1-Seven 1", Re-play role 5 is "Seven 1-Replay-Seven 1", Re-play role 6 is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1", Replay role 7 is "Replay-Replay-BAR", Replay role 8 is "Replay-BAR-BAR", Replay role 9 is "BAR-Replay-BAR", Replay role 10 is "BAR-BAR-BAR", Replay role 11 is "Replay-Replay-Seven 2", Replay role 12 is "Replay-Seven 2-Seven 2", and Replay role 13. is "Seven 2-Replay-Seven 2", the re-playing hand 14 is "Replay-Seven 2-BAR", the re-playing hand 15 is "BAR-Seven 2-BAR", and the re-playing hand 16 is "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2". Among the above replayed roles, replayed roles 1 and 2 are referred to as "Normal replay", replayed roles 3-5 as "Blue 7 replay", replayed role 6 as "Blue 7 replay", replayed roles 7-9 as "BAR failed replay", replayed role 10 as "BAR replay", replayed roles 11-14 as "Peach 7 replay", and replayed roles 15 and 16 as "Peach 7 replay". Sometimes.

The replay hands 1 to 16 may be hands that allow the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when a replay wins, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of inserted medals is reset in a medal insertion number storage area to be described later), or the medals inserted in the replay winning game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

Small combinations 1 to 19 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are as follows: small hand 1 is "Seven 1-Cherry-Replay", small hand 2 is "Blank 1-Cherry-Replay", small hand 3 is "Seven 1-Cherry-Seven 1", small hand 4 is "Blank 1-Cherry-Blank 1", small hand 5 is "Replay-Watermelon-Bell", small hand 6 is "Bell-Blank 1-Replay", small hand 7 is "Bell-Blank 2-Replay", and small hand. 8 is ``Bell-Seven 2-Replay'', 9 is ``Bell-Seven 1-Replay'', 10 is ``Blank 1-Replay-Seven 1'', 11 is ``Blank 1-Replay-BAR'', 12 is ``Seven 2-Replay-Seven 1'', 13 is ``Seven 2-Replay-BAR'', 14 is ``Seven 1-Seven 1-Bell'', and 15 is "Seven 2-Seven 1-Bell", the small combination 16 is "Seven 1-Seven 2-Bell", the small combination 17 is "Seven 2-Seven 2-Bell", the small combination 18 is "Bell-Bell-Bell", and the small combination 19 is "Replay-Bell-Watermelon". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in FIG.

In addition, among the above small wins, the small wins 1 and 2 are called “weak cherry”, the small wins 3 and 4 are “strong cherry”, the small win 5 is “watermelon”, the small wins 6 to 17 are “single win”, and the small wins 18 and 19 are sometimes called “Bell”.

《Types of internally elected roles》
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 69 shows the types and names of internal winning combinations.

FIG. 69 shows 11 types of internal winning combinations (condition device numbers 1 to 11), which are combinations of the combinations explained in FIGS. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by lottery at the start of the game.

Condition device number 1 is a condition device in which replay hands 1 to 4, 7 and 8 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, the replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won by the left first stop and the middle first stop. In addition, in the case of the right first stop, one of replay combinations 1, 3, 4, 7, and 8 (normal replay, blue 7 failure replay, BAR failure replay) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation. In the case of the right first stop, if the seven 1 pattern or the BAR pattern is a constituent pattern of a winnable combination on the reel subjected to the stop operation, and if this pattern is within the maximum drawing range, this pattern is preferentially stopped.

Condition device number 2 is a condition device in which replay hands 1 to 10 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, the replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won by the left first stop and the middle first stop. In addition, in the case of the right first stop, one of replay hands 1, 3 to 10 (normal replay, replay out of blue 7, replay out of blue 7, replay out of BAR, replay of BAR) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation. In the case of the right first stop, if the seven 1 pattern or the BAR pattern is a constituent pattern of a winnable combination on the reel subjected to the stop operation, and if this pattern is within the maximum drawing range, this pattern is preferentially stopped.

Condition device number 3 is a condition device in which replay hands 1 to 6, 11 to 13, and 16 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, the replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won by the left first stop and the middle first stop. In addition, in the case of the right first stop, one of replay combinations 1, 3 to 6, 11 to 13, 16 (normal replay, blue 7 failure replay, blue 7 replay, pink 7 failure replay, pink 7 replay) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation. In the case of the right first stop, if the seven 1 pattern or the seven 2 pattern is a constituent pattern of a winnable combination on the reel for which the stop operation is performed, and if this pattern is within the maximum drawing range, this pattern is preferentially stopped.

Condition device number 4 is a condition device in which replay hands 1 to 7, 9, 14 and 15 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, the replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won by the left first stop and the middle first stop. In addition, in the case of the right first stop, one of replay hands 1, 3 to 7, 9, 14, 15 (normal replay, blue 7 failure replay, blue 7 replay, BAR failure replay, pink 7 failure replay, pink 7 replay) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation. In the case of the right first stop, the seven 1 pattern, the seven 2 pattern, and the BAR pattern are constituent patterns of the winable combination on the reel subjected to the stop operation, and if this pattern is within the maximum drawing range, this pattern is preferentially stopped.

Condition device number 5 is a condition device in which minor wins 1 and 2 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, either a small win 1 or 2 (weak cherry) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Condition device number 6 is a condition device in which minor wins 3 and 4 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, either a small win 3 or 4 (strong cherry) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

The condition device number 7 is a condition device in which the minor winning combination 5 is independently elected internally. In this conditional device, a small winning combination of 5 (watermelon) is won.

Condition device number 8 is a condition device in which minor wins 11, 12, 14, 15 and 18 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, a small win 18 (Bell) is won by left first stop. In addition, in the case of the middle first stop and the right first stop, there is a case where one of the small wins 11, 12, 14, 15 (single win) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Condition device number 9 is a condition device in which minor wins 8, 9, 16, 17 and 19 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, a small win 19 (Bell) is won by the medium first stop. In addition, in the case of left first stop and right first stop, there is a case where one of the small wins 8, 9, 16, and 17 (one win) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Condition device number 10 is a condition device in which minor wins 6, 7, 12, 13, and 19 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, a small win 19 (Bell) is won by right first stop. In addition, in the case of the left first stop and the middle first stop, there is a case where one of the small wins 6, 7, 12, 13 (single win) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

The conditional device number 11 is a conditional device in which the minor winning combination 18 is independently elected internally. In this conditional device, a small winning combination of 18 (Bell) is won.

For the condition device numbers 8 to 10, operation conditions for winning the bell (minor wins 18 and 19) (here, pressing order, hereinafter correct pressing order) are defined. In the following description, conditional device numbers 8 to 10 may be collectively referred to as push order bells. In the case of internal winning of these condition device numbers 8 to 10, if the stop operation matches the pressing order of the respective correct answers, the bell (small wins 18 and 19) is won. On the other hand, when the stop operation does not match the correct pressing order, the internally won one-card combination (small combination 6 to 17) other than the bell (small combination 18, 19) is preferentially stopped. In the above configuration, if the stop operation does not match the correct pressing order, there is a case where the game is lost, but for example, if the stopping operation does not match the correct pressing order, such as the above-mentioned single role always wins, it may be configured to always win some role.

《Types of game state》
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 100 and their transitions will be described. FIG. 70 is a transition diagram of game states of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 is configured to be able to switch between a plurality of types of game states with different degrees of advantage, namely, a normal state, a chance zone (sometimes referred to as CZ), an AT state, and a special zone, and the degree of advantage is changed by switching between these states to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 70 shows the above-described four game states, and their transition conditions are indicated on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is met, the game state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a lottery table for internal winning combinations in the case of set values 1 and 6. In FIG. In this figure, the vertical axis indicates the condition device number of the internal winning combination (condition device), and the horizontal axis indicates the setting value, respectively, and the setting value and the lottery value (size of the range of lottery data) corresponding to the internal winning combination are shown. These lottery values are common to the four game states described above. If the condition device is not internally won in the game, it is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the symbol combination relating to the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as "losing". In addition, the fact that the role was not won may be expressed as "won't win".

In the game state to be described later, the internal winning probability of the role is obtained by dividing the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each role from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 by the numerical data (for example, 65536) in the range of the random number acquired at the time of the internal lottery. For example, with the setting value 1, the lottery value of the common bell (minor combination 18) of the condition device number 11 is 1200, and the winning probability is 1200/65536≈1.83%.

Regarding the difference in internal winning probability, there is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the advantage. More specifically, the ball payout rate for settings 1 to 3 (expected number of medals paid out per game / number of medals used per game x 100) is below 100%, and the ball payout rate for settings 4 to 6 is above 100%. That is, settings 4 to 6 are set values that are advantageous to the player.

The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination and loss. A random number value obtained as a result of executing an internal lottery is determined as a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to which combination, and an internal lottery combination (internal winning combination) is determined. It should be noted that the staff of the amusement arcade or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values using a set value switch (not shown).

Hereinafter, each game state will be described with appropriate reference to the drawings.

"Normal state"
The normal state is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In the normal state, if state B, which will be described later, is set, pt can be acquired as the game progresses, and the total acquired pt increases (step S1247 in FIG. 77). In the third embodiment, when the value of the number of pt high-probability remaining games, which will be described later, is greater than 0, the cumulative acquired pt is likely to increase. In addition, the number of pt high-probability sets is provided, and when this value is larger than 0, the number of pt high-probability remaining games is added again even if the number of pt high-probability remaining games becomes 0, and a configuration is adopted in which the state in which the cumulative acquisition pt tends to increase continues. In the following description, the state in which the pt high probability flag is ON (the state in which the accumulated pt is likely to increase) may be referred to as the high probability mode, and the state in which the pt high probability flag is OFF may be referred to as the normal mode. When this cumulative acquisition pt reaches 1000pt or more, a chance zone shift lottery and an AT direct hit lottery are executed in exchange for 1000pt (step S1211 in FIG. 76). FIG. 70 shows that if the chance zone transfer lottery is won in the normal state, the game moves to the chance zone (arrow (A) in FIG. 70, Yes in step S1B05 in FIG. 85). It also shows that if the AT direct hit lottery is won in the normal state, the state shifts to the AT state (arrow (E) in FIG. 70, Yes in step S1B01 in FIG. 85). In addition, it is shown that when the set number of games to move to the chance zone has passed in the normal state, the game moves to the chance zone (arrow (A) in FIG. 70, Yes in step S1B09 in FIG. 85). The number of games to be moved to the chance zone uses the value (step S1013 in FIG. 73) that is set when winning the lottery for transition to state B, which will be described later, in the normal state.

《Chance Zone (CZ)》
The chance zone is a game state in which the player is more likely to obtain a profit than in the normal state and is more advantageous than the normal state. In this chance zone, when the pressing order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally won, the notification of the corresponding correct stop operation order (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation navigation) is displayed (step S1505 in FIG. 83, step S3005 in FIG. 92). Note that this operation navigation is not limited to indicating the pressing order, and may indicate the timing of the stop operation, such as a display such as "Aim for ...!", or may indicate both the pressing order and the timing. In the following description, operation navigation for the pressing order bell may be referred to as bell navigation. In addition, unlike the third embodiment, a configuration may be employed in which the correct pushing order is displayed in 50% of those who win the pushing order bell condition device during CZ. In this case, it becomes more difficult (disadvantageous) to obtain a profit than in the AT state, but the state is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state.

When the AT lottery is won in the chance zone, if the number of CZ remaining games is not 0, the game state shifts to the AT state by internally winning the corresponding condition device (Yes at step S1C01 in FIG. 86, or Yes at step S1C03). In addition, when the number of CZ remaining games becomes 0 in a state where the AT lottery is won, the game state shifts to the AT state regardless of the result of the internal winning (even if the corresponding condition device is not internally winning) (Yes at step S1C09 in FIG. 86). On the other hand, if the AT lottery is not won and the number of CZ remaining games becomes 0, the game state shifts to the normal state (No in step S1C09 of FIG. 86). FIG. 70 shows that when the AT lottery is won in the chance zone, the state shifts to AT state (arrow (C) in FIG. 70, diagram), and shifts to the normal state when not won (arrow (B) in FIG. 70).

《AT state》
The AT state is advantageous to the player along with the chance zone and the specialized zone. In this AT state, similar to the chance zone, when the push-order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally won, the operation navigation corresponding to each is displayed, and it is an advantageous state in which the player can easily obtain a profit (step S1505 in FIG. 83, step S3005 in FIG. 92). This AT state is managed by the number of remaining AT games, and the number of remaining AT games may be added by lottery (steps S1403 and S1405 in FIG. 81(a)). In addition, in the third embodiment, by clearing a conditional addition (set in step S1409 of FIG. 81(a)), the number of remaining AT games may be added (step S1D03 of FIG. 85(a)).

Furthermore, in the AT state, when the special zone right lottery (step S1411 in FIG. 81(a)) is won and the blue 7 right is won, the game state shifts to the special zone by internally winning the corresponding condition device (step S1D11 in FIG. 87(a)). FIG. 70 shows that when the special zone transfer lottery is won in the AT state and the condition devices 2 to 4 are internally won, the game moves to the special zone (arrow (F) in FIG. 70), and when the AT end condition (for example, the number of remaining AT games is 0) is satisfied, the game moves to the normal state (arrow (D) in FIG. 70, Yes in step S1D13 in FIG. 87(a)).

《Specialized zone》
The specialized zone is a state advantageous to the player along with the chance zone and AT state. In this specialized zone, similar to the chance zone and AT state, when the push order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10) is internally won, the operation navigation corresponding to each is displayed, and it is an advantageous state in which the player can easily obtain a profit (step S1505 in FIG. 83, step S3005 in FIG. 92). In this specialized zone, the number of remaining AT games is not subtracted. Also, the number of remaining AT games may be added (steps S1423 and S1425 in FIG. 81(b)).

FIG. 70 shows that when a specialized zone end condition (for example, a prescribed number of games (20 games in the third embodiment) has passed) is established in the specialized zone, the state shifts to the AT state (arrow (G) in FIG. 70, step S1D25 in FIG. 87(b)). If the number of AT remaining games is 0 at the end of the special zone, the AT state is also ended and the state shifts to the normal state (step S1D27 in FIG. 87(b)).

<<State A and State B>>
In the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, the current state is divided into state A and state B and managed separately from the above-described four game states. State A is the state at the start of the normal state, and is also the state at the time of setting change or after RAM clearing. If the lottery for transition to state B is won in state A, state B is set (step S1003 in FIG. 73). The condition for transitioning to state B is that the transition is made when any winning combination is internally won during state A. In the third embodiment, there is a probability of about 80% that the player will be internally elected to some role. When this state B is set, initial settings such as setting the number of CZ transition games for shifting to the chance zone are executed (Yes at step S1005 in FIG. 73), and pt becomes available (No at step S1001 in FIG. 73). That is, while the state A is set in the normal state, it is impossible to shift to a game state other than the normal state, and when the state B is set, it becomes a state in which it is possible to shift to a game state other than the normal state. When the normal state is restored again, state A is set (step S1C11 in FIG. 86, step S1D15 in FIG. 87(a), step S1D27 in FIG. 87(b), step S1E21 in FIG. 88). In state B, there is a case where notification of the stop operation order (operation navigation) for the internally won combination is executed, and in state A, this operation navigation is not displayed.

As described above, when the state B is set, the state can be shifted to an advantageous state for the player, but if the state B continues for a long period of time, an excessive profit is obtained, or if a large amount of profit is obtained even for a short period of time, there is a risk of arousing the gambling spirit. In the third embodiment, in order to prevent such a situation, the following two conditions are separately provided as termination conditions for state B. The first case is when state B continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), which is managed using the number of games that can be continued in state B (if the determination in step S1E09 in FIG. 88 is No, the state B becomes Yes in step S1E03 of the next game and shifts to state A). The second case is when a predetermined number of net increase medals (for example, 2400 medals) is obtained from the time when the net increase number is the lowest, and this is managed using the MY counter (when step S1F21 in FIG. 89(a) determines Yes, immediately after step S1E03 becomes Yes and shifts to state A).

In the third embodiment, the state A and state B are distinguished by using the state B flag. If the state B flag is off, the state A is indicated, and if the state B flag is on, the state B is indicated.

《Overview of processing》
The processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<<Main processing of main control unit>>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received this activation signal is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value for the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt inhibition setting, initial setting of the I/O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation permission to the WDT 314 and initial value setting are performed.

In step S103, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (maintenance or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132), and the winning line display lamp 120 is lit according to the medals inserted. Also, when medals have been inserted, preparations are made for transmission of an insert command indicating this. If the player wins the replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it is checked whether or not a start lever 135 is operated while the specified number of medals are used, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the number of inserted medals and an effective winning line are determined, and the game is started.

In step S105, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out, and an internal lottery (lottery of combination) is performed using this and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316 to determine the internal winning combination. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300 .

At step S109, state processing at the time of game start is executed. Here, processing according to each game state and processing related to display of operation navigation are performed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S111, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started under the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer updating process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set to the game interval timer. Also, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to transmit a reel rotation start command to the first sub-controller 400 . After that, when the reels 110-112 reach a predetermined rotational speed, the optical sensors provided on each reel are detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation to the stop buttons 137-139 is activated. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in the third embodiment) to suppress gambling.

In step S113, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is validated, the reels 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 are stopped. Specifically, every time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. Further, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. For each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding commands (first to third press commands) to the first sub-controller 400, and every time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding commands (first to third stop commands) are prepared to be sent to the first sub-controller 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S115.

In step S115, a winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that Bell (small winning combination 23) has won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to transmit the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S117, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the awarded number is displayed using the payout number indicator 127.例文帳に追加

In step S119, game state update processing is performed. Here, based on the result of the game, the start preparation and end processing of the state B, and the update of the status regarding the state B are performed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the details of the game start state processing (step S109) in the main control unit main processing of FIG. 72 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the game start state process (step S109) in FIG.

First, in step S1001 executed first, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is off. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1003; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1031.

In step S1003, a lottery is made to determine whether or not to shift to state B based on the internal winning combination.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S1003 has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1007; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1041.

In step S1007, the state B flag is set to ON, and the number of games that can be continued in state B is set. Here, the number of games in which state B can be continued is a value that determines the number of games in which state B can be continued, and is configured so that state B is not maintained beyond this value. Although 1500 is set as this value in the third embodiment, it may be another constant, or may be determined by lottery from a plurality of values, not limited to a constant.

In step S1009, the value of the MY counter is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1011, the mode is set with reference to the table in FIG. 74(a). In the third embodiment, three types of CZ transition modes, mode A, mode B, and mode C, are provided, and the number of CZ transition games is set based on these modes. Here, for example, if the set value is 1, the probability that mode A will be selected is 70%, the probability that mode B will be set is 20%, and the probability that mode C will be selected is 10%. Note that the lottery probability of the mode may be varied for each setting such that the higher the setting, the higher the rate of transition to mode C is set. Also, the mode that is most likely to be set may be changed for each setting.

In step S1013, the value of the number of CZ transition games is set with reference to the table of FIG. 74(b). For example, when mode A is set as the CZ transition mode, the probability that the number of CZ transition games is selected in the range of 201-300 is 10%. Also, for example, when mode B is set, the probability that the number of CZ transition games is selected in the range of 101-200 is 20%. The number of CZ transition games is selected by further lottery from one of these numerical ranges, but the lottery probability at this time may be uniform within the numerical range, or may be biased so that a specific range or specific value within the numerical range is easily (or difficultly) selected. In the third embodiment, after the state B is set in the normal state, the state is shifted to the CZ after the number of CZ shift games set here has elapsed without shifting to the CZ.

In step S1015, the value of the cumulative acquisition pt is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1017.

In step S1017, the value of the number of games played in state B is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1019.

In step S1019, the value of the number of pt high probability remaining games is set to 10, and the process proceeds to step S1041.

In step S1031, state B related processing at game start is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1041. The details of this state B transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1041, preparations are made to transmit the internal winning command to the first sub-control unit 400, and the game start state processing is terminated. It should be noted that this internal winning command includes the internal winning condition device number, gaming state, number of remaining games in each state (number of CZ remaining games, number of remaining AT games and number of additional games, number of remaining games in specialized zone), acquired pt and cumulative acquired pt, pt high probability remaining game number, pt high probability set number, execution status and result of CZ lottery and AT lottery (step S1211 in FIG. 76), state B flag, pt high probability flag, number of state B progressed games, number of CZ transition games, conditional. Information such as the state of the add-on flag, conditions for clearing conditional add-on, presence/absence of various rights (BAR right, pink 7 right, blue 7 right), instruction information, and the like are included.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, details of the game start state B related processing (step S1031) in the game start state processing of FIG. 73 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the state B-related processing (step S1031) at the start of the game in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1103; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1103, normal related processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1121. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is CZ. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1107; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1107, CZ-related processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1121. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the AT state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1111; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1113.

AT-related processing is executed in step S1111, and the process proceeds to step S1121. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1113, specialized zone-related processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1121. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1121, an instruction information setting process is executed, and the game start state B related process is ended. This instruction information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the normal related processing (step S1103) in the game start state B related processing of FIG. 75 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart of the normal related processing (step S1103) in FIG.

First, in the first step S1201, it is determined whether or not the 1000pt reaching flag is ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1211; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1203.

In step S1203, a lottery for the number of pt high probability sets is executed. In the lottery for the number of pt high-probability sets, the lottery type associated with the internal winning combination (see the lottery type column in FIG. 69) and the table in FIG. 78(c) are used. For example, in the condition device corresponding to the lottery type B (eg, condition device number 5), the pt high probability set number lottery is won with a probability of 20%. After this lottery, the process proceeds to step S1205.

In step S1205, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S1203 has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1207; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1221.

In step S1207, the value of the number of pt high probability sets is added. In determining the value to be added here, the current set value and the table of FIG. 78(d) are used. For example, when the set value is 1, 1 is added with a probability of 75%, and 2 is added with a probability of 25%. After that, the process proceeds to step S1209.

In step S1209, the pt high probability flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S1221.

In step S1211, a lottery (CZ lottery, AT lottery) is executed as to whether or not to set the CZ and AT states. The table shown in FIG. 79(a) is used for these lotteries. For example, if the set value is set to 1 to 4, the CZ lottery will be won with a probability of 20%, and the AT lottery will be won with a probability of 5%.

In step S1213, 1000 is subtracted from the value of the cumulative acquisition pt, and the process proceeds to step S1215.

In step S1215, the 1000pt arrival flag is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S1217.

In step S1217, the value of the number of pt high probability sets is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1219.

In step s1219, the pt high probability flag is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S1221.

In step S1221, pt acquisition related processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1231. The details of this pt acquisition related process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1231, 1 is added to the value of the number of games played in state B, and the process proceeds to step S1233.

In step S1233, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of pt high-probability remaining games is greater than zero. If this condition is satisfied, the normal related processing is terminated; otherwise, the process advances to step S1235.

In step S1235, it is determined whether or not the value of cumulative earned pt is 1000 pt or more. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1237; otherwise, this normal related processing ends.

In step S1237, the 1000pt arrival flag is set to ON, and this normal related processing is terminated.

Next, details of the pt acquisition related process (step S1221) in the normal related process of FIG. 76 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the pt acquisition related process (step S1221) in FIG.

First, in the first step S1241, it is determined whether or not the pt high probability flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1243; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1245.

In step S1243, a pt lottery (high probability mode) is executed. In this pt lottery, the lottery type associated with the internal winning combination (see the lottery type column in FIG. 69) and the table in FIG. 78(b) are used. For example, the condition device corresponding to the lottery type A (eg, condition device number 1) acquires 10pt with a probability of 80% and 20pt with a probability of 20%. Note that these probabilities and values are examples, and arbitrary values can be adopted. After this lottery, the process proceeds to step S1247.

In step S1245, a pt lottery (normal mode) is executed. In this pt lottery, the lottery type associated with the internal winning combination (see the lottery type column in FIG. 69) and the table in FIG. 78(a) are used. For example, in the condition device corresponding to the lottery type A (eg, condition device number 1), 5pt with a probability of 15% and 10pt with a probability of 5%. Note that these probabilities and values are examples, and arbitrary values can be adopted. After this lottery, the process proceeds to step S1247.

In step S1247, the pt acquired in step S1243 or step S1245 is added to the total acquired pt, and the process proceeds to step S1251.

In step S1251, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of pt high-probability remaining games is greater than zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1253; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1255.

In step S1253, 1 is subtracted from the number of pt high-probability remaining games, and the pt acquisition-related processing is terminated.

In step S1255, it is determined whether or not the number of pt high-probability sets is greater than zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1257; otherwise, the pt acquisition related process ends.

In step S1257, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of pt high probability sets, and the process proceeds to step S1259.

In step S1259, 10 is added to the number of pt high-probability remaining games, and the process proceeds to step S1253.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the details of the CZ related processing (step S1107) in the game start state B related processing of FIG. 75 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the CZ-related processing (step S1107) in FIG.

First, in step S1301 executed first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number of CZ remaining games, and the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the player has either the BAR right or the peach 7 right (the right to be acquired when AT is won). If this condition is satisfied, the CZ-related processing is terminated; otherwise, the process advances to step S1305.

In step S1305, a lottery (AT lottery) is executed to determine whether or not to set the AT state. In this lottery, the lottery type associated with the internal winning combination (see the lottery type column in FIG. 69) and the table in FIG. 79(b) are used. For example, in the condition device corresponding to lottery type B (eg, condition device number 5), the AT lottery is won with a probability of 20%. Also, if the player wins the lottery here, then a lottery (distribution lottery) is executed to acquire either the BAR right or the peach 7 right. The table shown in FIG. 79(c) is used for this lottery. For example, if the setting value is set to 1 to 5, the BAR right is obtained with a probability of 80%, and the Peach 7 right is obtained with a probability of 20%. If the AT lottery is won in this process, either the BAR right or the peach 7 right is acquired. In addition, in the third embodiment, the AT lottery is performed in one stage, but for example, when such a lottery is won a plurality of times (for example, three times), it may be configured to shift to the AT state. Furthermore, in this configuration, when the peach 7 right is acquired, it may be determined that the state is shifted to the AT state even if the player has not won multiple times. Further, a BAR right acquisition lottery may be performed, and the winning of the replay role 10 with the BAR right acquired may be counted as one of a plurality of winnings.

Next, the details of the AT-related processing (step S1111) in the state B-related processing at the time of game start in FIG. 75 will be described with reference to FIG. 81(a). This figure is a flowchart of the AT-related processing (step S1111) in FIG.

First, in the first step S1401, 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining AT games, and the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, a lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games is executed. In this lottery, the lottery type associated with the internal winning combination (see the lottery type column in FIG. 69) and the table in FIG. 82(a) are used. For example, when the condition device corresponding to the lottery type D (for example, the condition device number 7) is internally won, the number of remaining AT games is added with a probability of 40%, and the breakdown is 10 with a probability of 90% and 20 with a probability of 10%. Note that these probabilities and values are examples, and arbitrary values can be adopted. In addition, in the third embodiment, the lottery for adding the number of AT remaining games is executed for all conditional devices, but this lottery may not be executed depending on the conditional device.

In step S1405, the number of remaining AT games is added based on the lottery result in step S1403, and the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1407, it is determined whether or not the conditional addition flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1411; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1409.

In step S1409, a conditional additional lottery is executed. Here, an addition lottery for the number of AT remaining games obtained when a conditional addition (details will be described later) is cleared is executed. 82(b) is used for this lottery, 10 games are selected as the number of additional games with a probability of 20%, 20 games are selected as the number of additional games with a probability of 5%, 30 games are selected as the number of additional games with a probability of 5%, and 100 games are selected as the number of additional games with a probability of 0.1%. Note that these probabilities and values are examples, and arbitrary values can be adopted. Also, in the third embodiment, conditional additional lottery is executed for all condition devices, but this lottery may not be executed depending on the condition device. When this conditional addition lottery is won, the conditional addition flag is set to ON, and a lottery is executed for the conditions for clearing the conditional addition lottery. After that, the process proceeds to step S1411.

In step S1411, a lottery (specialized zone right lottery) is executed to determine whether or not to acquire the right to move to the specialized zone. The right to be obtained when winning this lottery is called the Blue 7 right. The table shown in FIG. 82(c) is used for this lottery. For example, if the setting value is set to 1 to 5, the blue 7 right is obtained with a probability of 0.05%. Note that these probabilities and values are examples, and arbitrary values can be adopted. Also, in the third embodiment, the special zone right lottery is executed for all conditional devices, but this lottery may not be executed depending on the conditional device. After this lottery, this AT-related processing ends.

Next, the details of the specialization related process (step S1113) in the game start state B related process of FIG. 75 will be described with reference to FIG. 81(b). This figure is a flowchart of the specialization-related processing (step S1113) in FIG.

First, in the first step S1421, 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining games in the specialized zone, and the process proceeds to step S1423.

In step S1423, an extra lottery for the number of AT remaining games is executed. In this lottery, the internal winning combination and the table shown in FIG. 82(d) are used. For example, when the condition device number 2 is internally won, 10 games are added to the AT remaining game number with 100% probability, and when the condition device numbers 3 and 4 are internally won, 30 games are added to the AT remaining game number with 100% probability. It should be noted that the values of the condition device, the probability, and the number of additional games are examples, and arbitrary values can be adopted.

In step S1425, the number of remaining AT games is added based on the result of the lottery in step S1423, and this specialization-related processing ends.

Next, details of the instruction information setting process (step S1121) in the game start state B related process of FIG. 75 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the instruction information setting process (step S1121) in FIG.

First, in step S1501 executed first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is any one of CZ, AT state, and special zone. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1503; otherwise, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not an internal lottery has been made for the pushing order bell (condition device numbers 8 to 10). If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1505; otherwise, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1505, the correct pressing order of the bell (bell navigation) is set as the instruction information, and the instruction information setting process is terminated.

Next, details of the game state update process (step S119) in the main control unit main process of FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the game state update process (step S119) in FIG.

First, in step S1A01 executed first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A03; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1A05.

In step S1A03, normal update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A21. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A05, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is CZ. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A07; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1A09.

In step S1A07, update processing during CZ is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A21. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A09, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the AT state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A11; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1A13.

In step S1A11, update processing during AT is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A21. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A13, a mid-specialization update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A21. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87(b).

In step S1A21, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1A23; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1A27.

In step S1A23, state B termination determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1A25. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1A25, the instruction information is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1A27.

In step S1A27, preparations are made to send a game state update command. This command includes information such as internal winning condition device number, winning combination determination result, game state, state B flag, pt high probability flag, 1000 pt reaching flag, number of additional games by conditional additional clear, and the like.

Next, details of the update process (step S1A03) during normal in the game state update process of FIG. 84 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the update process (step S1A03) during normal in FIG.

First, in step S1B01 executed first, it is determined whether or not the AT lottery (step S1211 in FIG. 76) of the normal related process is won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B03; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1B05.

In step S1B03, the gaming state is set to the AT state, and the initial value is set to the number of remaining AT games. The table shown in FIG. 79(d) is used to determine the initial value of the number of remaining AT games. Here, since AT winning (AT direct hit) in the normal state, 30 games with a probability of 70%, 50 games with a probability of 20%, 100 games with a probability of 7%, and 200 games with a probability of 3% are set as initial values. After that, this update processing during normal is finished.

In step S1B05, it is determined whether or not the CZ lottery (step S1211 in FIG. 76) of the normal related process is won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B07; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1B09.

In step S1B07, the gaming state is set to CZ, and 20 is set as an initial value to the number of CZ remaining games. After that, this update processing during normal is ended.

In step S1B09, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of games after state B is greater than or equal to the value of the number of games transitioning to CZ. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B07; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1B11.

In step S1B11, it is determined whether or not the number of pt high-probability remaining games and the number of pt high-probability sets are both zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1B13; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1B15.

In step S1B13, the pt high-probability flag is set to OFF, and this update process during normal is completed.

In step S1B15, the pt high probability flag is set to ON, and this update process during normal is completed.

Next, details of the updating process during CZ (step S1A07) in the game state updating process of FIG. 84 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the update processing during CZ (step S1A07) in FIG.

First, in step S1C01 executed first, it is determined whether or not the condition device number 2 is internally won while the BAR right is acquired. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C05; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1C03.

In step S1C03, it is determined whether or not the conditional device number 3 or the conditional device number 4 is internally won while the peach 7 right is acquired. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C05; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1C07.

In step S1C05, the gaming state is set to the AT state, and the initial value is set to the number of remaining AT games. The table shown in FIG. 79(d) is used to determine the initial value of the number of remaining AT games. In this case, if the AT win is CZ and, for example, the BAR right is acquired, the initial values are set to 50 games with a probability of 70%, 100 games with a probability of 25%, and 200 games with a probability of 5%. It should be noted that the acquired BAR rights or peach 7 rights are erased (used) in this process. After that, this update processing during CZ ends.

In step S1C07, it is determined whether or not the number of CZ remaining games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C09; otherwise, this mid-CZ update process ends.

In step S1C09, it is determined whether either the BAR right or the peach 7 right has been acquired. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1C05; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1C11.

In step S1C11, the state B end flag is set to ON, and this update processing during CZ is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87(a), the details of the update process during AT (step S1A11) in the game state update process of FIG. 84 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the update process during AT (step S1A11) in FIG.

First, in step S1D01 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the clear condition set in the conditional addition lottery (step S1409 in FIG. 81(a)) of the AT-related processing has been established. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D03; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1D05.

In step S1D03, the number of remaining AT games is added according to the privilege (addition of the number of AT remaining games) set in the AT-related processing conditional addition lottery (step S1409 in FIG. 81(a)), and the process proceeds to step S1D05.

In step S1D05, the conditional addition flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1D07.

In step S1D07, it is determined whether or not the blue 7 right has been acquired in the special zone right lottery (step S1411 in FIG. 81(a)) of the AT-related processing. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D09; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1D13.

In step S1D09, it is determined whether or not an internal win has been made for any of the condition device numbers 2, 3, and 4. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D11; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1D13.

In step S1D11, the gaming state is set to the special zone, and 20 is set as the initial value for the number of remaining games in the special zone. It should be noted that the acquired Blue 7 right is erased (used) in this process. After that, this update processing during AT ends.

In step S1D13, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining AT games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D15; otherwise, the update process during AT ends.

In step S1D15, the state B end flag is set to ON, and this update process during AT ends.

Next, using FIG. 87(b), the details of the update processing during specialization (step S1A13) in the game state update processing of FIG. 84 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the update processing during specialization (step S1A13) in FIG.

First, in step S1D21 executed first, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games in the special zone is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D23; otherwise, the update processing during specialization ends.

In step S1D23, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining AT games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1D27; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1D25.

In step S1D25, the gaming state is set to AT state, and this update processing during specialization ends.

In step S1D27, the state B end flag is set to ON, and this mid-specialization update process ends.

Next, details of the state B end determination process (step S1A23) in the game state update process of FIG. 84 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the state B termination determination process (step S1A23) in FIG.

First, in the first step S1E01, MY counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1E03. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89(a). Note that this MY counter update process may be configured to be executed at the end of the state B end determination process.

In step S1E03, it is determined whether or not the limiter flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E13; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1E05.

In step S1E05, it is determined whether or not the state B end flag is ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1E21; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1E07.

In step S1E07, the number of games that can be continued in state B is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1E09.

In step S1E09, it is determined whether or not the number of games that can be continued in state B is greater than zero. If this condition is satisfied, the state B end determination process is terminated, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1E11.

In step S1E11, the limiter flag is set to ON, and this state B end determination processing is terminated.

In step S1E13, automatic settlement and stop processing are executed, and the process proceeds to step S1E21. The details of this automatic settlement and stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 89(b).

In step S1E21, flags and variables for state B are initialized. A transition from state B to state A is performed by this process. In this process, the game state is set to the normal state, and the state B flag, the state B end flag, the pt high probability flag, the 1000 pt reaching flag, and the limiter flag are set to OFF. Also, the number of state B continuable games, the number of state B progressed games, the number of remaining AT games, the value of the MY counter, the cumulative acquisition pt, the number of CZ transition games, the number of pt high probability remaining games, and the number of pt high probability sets are initialized to 0, respectively.

Next, details of the MY counter update process (step S1E01) in the state B end determination process of FIG. 88 will be described with reference to FIG. 89(a). This figure is a flow chart of the MY counter update process (step S1E01) in FIG.

First, in step S1F11 executed first, it is determined whether or not the previous winning combination is a replay combination. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F21; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1F13.

In step S1F13, the number of payouts in the previous game is added to the value of the MY counter to update the value of the MY counter. After that, the process proceeds to step S1F15.

In step S1F15, the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted in the previous game from the value of the MY counter is updated as the value of the MY counter. After that, the process proceeds to step S1F17.

In step S1F17, it is determined whether or not the value of the MY counter is negative. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F19; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1F21.

In step S1F19, the value of the MY counter is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1F21. It should be noted that the value of the MY counter is cleared to 0 each time the minimum value is updated in steps S1F17 and S1F19, and the value of the MY counter becomes a value indicating the increment from the minimum value.

In step S1F21, it is determined whether or not the value of the MY counter is greater than 2400. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F23; otherwise, the MY counter update process is terminated.

In step S1F23, the limiter flag is set to ON, and this MY counter update process is terminated.

Next, using FIG. 89(b), the details of the automatic settlement and stop processing (step S1E13) in the state B end determination processing of FIG. 88 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the automatic settlement and stop processing (step S1E13) in FIG.

First, in step S1F31 executed first, it is determined whether or not the automatic settlement function is set to be valid (automatic settlement function ON). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F33; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1F41.

In step S1F33, automatic settlement is started, and the process proceeds to step S1F35.

In step S1F35, it is determined whether all the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 have been ejected from the medal payout port 155 (settlement is completed). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F41; otherwise, step S1F35 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1F41, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be valid (stop function ON). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1F43; otherwise, this automatic settlement and stop processing is terminated.

In step S1F43, the stopping function is activated, and the process proceeds to step S1F45.

In step S1F45, it is determined whether or not the stop function has been released. If this condition is met, this automatic settlement and stop processing is terminated. If not, this step S1F45 is repeatedly executed.

<<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 2 ms in the third embodiment).

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is restarted periodically (in the third embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main controller timer interrupt) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the third embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected).

In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the signals are stored in the signal state storage areas provided separately for each sensor 318 in the RAM 308. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed in this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes corresponding to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in units of time, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S<b>211 , command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400 . In the third embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits. Bit 15 is strobe information (if it is on, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are command types (in the third embodiment, basic command, bet command, start lever reception command, internal winning command, reel rotation start command accompanying start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands accompanying reception of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel 1). 10 to 112 stop command, winning command, payout number command and payout completion command accompanying medal payout processing, game state update command), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control part 400, it is possible to determine the performance control according to the change of the game control in the main control part 300 according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, and to determine the performance control contents based on the information of the command data included in the output schedule information.

In step S213, an external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334 . For example, when state B is set, a signal indicating this (state B signal) is output.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and when an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 336, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low-voltage signal is received (power shutdown is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and if a low-voltage signal is not received (power supply shutdown is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information (recovery data) that needs to be saved, such as a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of the power failure, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, a checksum value for the predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power supply flag indicating that the power failure process has been performed is set to ON.

<<Processing of the first sub-controller 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 91(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG. FIG. 91(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400. FIG.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information representing the game state. Also, the value of the display pt is set to 0 regardless of the value of the total earned pt in the main control unit 300 . At this time, there may be a difference between the value of the cumulative acquisition pt and the value of the display pt. This deviation is resolved when the total earned pt reaches 1000 or when the state B ends (the state B is newly entered with both the total earned pt and the display pt initialized). In addition, instead of displaying the value of pt for display during the period in which this deviation occurs, ? ? ? It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value of pt for display is not displayed, or the value of pt for display is not displayed.

When the setting is changed or the RAM 308 is cleared (when there is no return data in the main control unit 300), the normal default background (hereinafter referred to as normal background) is set as the background, and the first thing in the morning flag is set to ON. Also, if there is recovery data, the display is set according to the state before the power failure. For example, in the normal state (regardless of state A, state B, normal mode, or high probability mode), the normal background is set. Also, for the CZ, AT state, and special zone, the number of remaining games and the corresponding background are set, and the state before the power failure is restored. Note that if the state before the power failure is the normal state, the first morning flag is set to ON. After the power is turned on, the demo screen may be displayed regardless of whether the settings have been changed.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed. The details of this command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 91(d).

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. Here, production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408 . This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing updating processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command for the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command for various lamps 420 in the effect data read out in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422. FIG.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command for shutter control in the performance data read in step S309, the shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to set transmission of the control command to the second sub-controller 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub-controller 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, the setting for outputting this control command is made, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 91(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-controller 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main controller 300 . In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 91(c). The first sub-controller 400 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the third embodiment), and with this timer interrupt as a trigger, timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle.

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 91(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, transmission of the device data to the second sub-control section 500 set in step S315, update processing of the random number value for effect, and the like are performed.

Next, details of the command processing (step S307) in the first sub-controller main processing of FIG. 91(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 91(d). This figure is a flow chart of the command processing (step S307) in FIG. 91(a).

First, in step S341 executed first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S343; otherwise, the command processing ends.

In step S343, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from main control unit 300, is executed. Among these processes, the process when an internal winning command is received will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the processing when the gaming state update command is received will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, details of internal winning command processing (step S343) when an internal winning command is received in the command processing of FIG. 91(d) will be described. FIG. 92 is a flow chart of internal winning command processing (step S343) when an internal winning command is received in FIG. 91(d).

First, in step S3001 executed first, the game information included in the internal winning command is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S3003. The information to be acquired here includes the internal lottery condition device number, gaming state, number of remaining games in each state (number of CZ remaining games, number of remaining AT games and number of additional games, number of remaining games in specialized zone), acquired pt and cumulative acquired pt, pt high probability remaining game number, pt high probability set number, execution status and result of CZ lottery and AT lottery (step S1211 in FIG. 76), state B flag, pt high probability flag, number of state B progressed games, number of CZ transition games, conditional upper There is information such as the state of the topping flag, clearing conditions for conditional topping, presence or absence of various rights (BAR right, pink 7 right, blue 7 right), instruction information, and the like.

In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the instruction information has been acquired in step S3001. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3005; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3005.

At step S3005, effect data for executing operation navigation is set based on the condition device number and instruction information acquired at step S3001.

In step S3007, it is determined whether or not the first thing in the morning flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3009; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3013.

In step S3009, it is determined whether or not the first morning flag cancellation condition is met. In the third embodiment, the first morning flag cancellation condition is established by executing the CZ lottery or the AT lottery (step S1211 in FIG. 76). If 30 games or more have passed since the power was turned on, and if the game is in the normal state and in the normal mode (the pt high probability flag is off), the first morning flag cancellation condition is met. The number of games that have elapsed since the power was turned on may be determined using information transmitted from the main control section 300, or may be determined using a value counted by the first sub-control section 400. FIG. If the first morning flag cancellation condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3011; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3013.

In step S3011, the first thing in the morning flag is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S3013.

In step S3013, a process for setting an effect corresponding to the game state (effect setting process for each state) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3015. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3015, in addition to the above-described processing, processing upon reception of an internal winning command is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, details of the effect setting process for each state (step S3013) in the internal winning command process of FIG. 92 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the effect setting process (step S3013) for each state in FIG.

First, in step S3101 executed first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is CZ. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3103; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3103, the effect setting process during CZ is executed, and the effect setting process for each state is finished. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the game state is AT state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3107; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3109.

In step S3107, the effect setting process during AT is executed, and the effect setting process for each state ends. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3109, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the special zone. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3111; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3113.

In step S3111, specialization medium effect setting processing is executed, and the effect setting processing for each state is ended. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(b).

In step S3113, it is determined whether or not the first thing in the morning flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3115; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3117.

At step S3115, the first effect setting process in the morning is executed, and the effect setting process for each state ends. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3117, it is determined whether or not the game state is the normal state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3119, and if not, the effect setting process for each state is terminated.

In step S3119, normal medium effect setting processing is executed, and the effect setting processing for each state ends. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94(b).

Next, details of the first morning effect setting process (step S3115) in the effect setting process for each state in FIG. 93 will be described with reference to FIG. 94(a). This figure is a flow chart of the first morning effect setting process (step S3115) in FIG.

First, in step S3201, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not the value of pt for display is smaller than 995. If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S3203, and if not, the first-morning effect setting process is terminated.

In step S3203, a false pt addition effect is executed. In the third embodiment, the ROM 406 of the first sub-controller 400 stores the same table as shown in FIG. 78(a), and in state B, the lottery type associated with the internal winning combination (see the lottery type column in FIG. 69) and this table are used to execute the lottery for pt (not executed in state A). This lottery process is similar to the pt lottery (step S1245 in FIG. 77) in the normal mode in the main control unit 300, but the pt derived here is used only for presentation. The pt derived here in the normal mode is the same value as the pt derived by the main control unit 300, but if the type of derived value (for example, 0, 5, or 10 for lottery type A) is the same, the derived pt may have a different value. Further, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the pt lottery is not executed in the state A, but the pt lottery may be executed even in the state A. If there is a pt derived in this lottery, this pt is added to the value of the pt for display, and the value of this pt for display is displayed. This makes it possible to make it appear that the normal mode is set regardless of the presence or absence of the actual acquired pt and its value. It should be noted that the table used for the pt lottery here may be any table as long as it can make it appear that the normal mode is set even in the high-probability mode. For example, the lottery probability may be slightly different, and it may not necessarily be the same as the pt lottery table in the main control unit 300 . If the value of the display pt exceeds 995 when the display pt is added, the value of the display pt is set to 995 (the maximum value of the display pt is set to 995). In addition, for example, when the display pt exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 500), the frequency of adding the display pt is reduced, or the added pt is reduced, thereby making it difficult to increase the display pt. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the display pt is not added when the display pt exceeds a predetermined value (eg, 950).

Next, using FIG. 94(b), the details of the normal middle effect setting process (step S3119) in the effect setting process for each state in FIG. 93 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the normal effect setting process (step S3119) in FIG.

First, in step S3211 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the pt high probability flag is on. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3213; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3215.

In step S3213, setting is made to display (update) the value of the number of pt high-probability remaining games, and the process proceeds to step S3215.

In step S3215, it is determined whether or not pt (obtained by lottery in step S1243 or step S1245 in FIG. 77) is obtained. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3217; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3219.

In step S3217, a pt addition effect is executed. Specifically, the acquired pt is added to the current value of display pt, and an effect indicating that the acquired pt is added by displaying the acquired pt and the value of the display pt is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S3219.

In step S3219, it is determined whether or not the CZ lottery and the AT lottery (step S1211 in FIG. 76) have been executed. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3221; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3223.

In step S3221, a lottery effect (effect to expect a shift to CZ or AT state) is set, and the process proceeds to step S3223. When setting this effect, the value of the current cumulative earned pt is set as the value of the display pt.

In step S3223, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of games after state B is greater than or equal to the value of the number of games transitioning to CZ. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3225; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3227.

In step S3225, a CZ rush effect (effect indicating transition to the chance zone) is set, and the process proceeds to step S3227. In setting this effect, the already set effect is overwritten (discarded).

In step S3227, effects other than those described above (for example, background image settings corresponding to the high probability mode and normal mode) are appropriately set, and the normal medium effect setting process is terminated.

Next, details of the effect setting process during CZ (step S3103) in the effect setting process for each state in FIG. 93 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flow chart of the effect setting process during CZ (step S3103) in FIG.

First, in step S3301 which is executed first, an effect for displaying the current number of CZ remaining games is set. If there is the previously displayed CZ remaining game number, the current CZ remaining game number subtracted from that value is displayed.

In step S3303, it is determined whether or not the AT lottery (step S1305 in FIG. 80) has been won (the right to BAR or the right to Momo 7 has been obtained). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3305; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3313.

In step S3305, it is determined whether or not the condition device corresponding to the right acquired by the AT lottery is internally won. Specifically, when the BAR right is acquired, it is determined whether or not the condition device number 2 is internally won, and when the peach 7 right is acquired, it is determined whether or not the condition device numbers 3 and 4 are internally won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3307; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3307, an aim effect (effect to urge the player to aim for a specific role) is set. Specifically, when the BAR right is acquired, the operation order of the right first stop and the performance to urge the player to aim at the BAR pattern are set, and when the peach 7 right is acquired, the performance to aim at the BAR pattern and the seven 2 pattern in the operation order of the right first stop is set. After this process, the process advances to step S3309. Note that this aiming effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117. FIG.

In step S3309, an AT winning effect (an effect indicating that the player has won the AT lottery) is set. Note that the AT winning effect set here is executed at the timing after all the reels are stopped.

In step S3311, it is determined whether or not the number of CZ remaining games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3309; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3317.

In step S3313, it is determined whether or not the number of CZ remaining games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3315; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3317.

In step S3315, a CZ end effect (a effect indicating that the CZ has ended) is set. Incidentally, the CZ end effect set here is executed at the timing after all the reels are stopped.

At step S3317, effects other than those described above are appropriately set, and the process for setting effects during CZ ends. In addition, in this process, when the condition device number 1 is internally won, an effect may be set in the operation order of the right first stop and to urge the player to aim at the BAR symbol.

Next, using FIG. 96(a), details of the effect setting process during AT (step S3107) in the effect setting process for each state in FIG. 93 will be described. This figure is a flow chart of the effect setting process during AT (step S3107) in FIG.

First, in step S3401 executed first, an effect of displaying the current number of remaining AT games is set. If there is an AT remaining game number that was previously displayed, the subtraction from that value to the current AT remaining game number is displayed.

In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the AT addition lottery (step S1403 in FIG. 81(a)) is won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3405; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3407.

In step S3405, an additional effect is set according to the number of games won by the AT additional lottery, and the process proceeds to step S3407.

In step S3407, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone transition condition is satisfied. This specialized zone transfer condition is established by internally winning condition device numbers 2, 3, and 4 after winning the specialized zone right lottery (step S1411 in FIG. 81(a)). If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3409; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3413.

In step S3409, an aim effect (effect to urge the player to aim for a specific role) is set. Specifically, an effect is set in which the player is urged to aim at the blue 7 symbols in the operation order of right first stop. After this process, the process advances to step S3411.

In step S3411, a special zone entry effect (an effect indicating that the game has shifted to the special zone) is set. In addition, the special zone entry effect set here is executed at the timing after all the reels are stopped. After this process, the flow advances to step S3417.

In step S3413, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining AT games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3415; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3417.

At step S3415, an AT state end effect (a effect indicating that the AT state has ended) is set. Note that the AT state end effect set here is executed at the timing after all the reels are stopped.

In step S3417, effects other than those described above are appropriately set, and the effect setting process during AT ends. In addition, in this process, when the condition device number 1 is internally won, an effect is set in which the operation order is right first stop and the player is urged to aim at the blue 7 symbol. Also, in the game immediately after the conditional addition flag is turned on, a conditional addition effect may be set. In displaying the AT remaining game count value, the first sub-control unit 400 may separately manage a display value, use this value to display a value smaller than the actual AT remaining game count value, and then display the actual value.

Next, using FIG. 96(b), the details of the effect setting process during specialization (step S3111) in the effect setting process for each state in FIG. 93 will be described. 93. This figure is a flow chart of the effect setting process during specialization (step S3111) in FIG.

First, in step S3421 that is executed first, an effect for displaying the current number of remaining specialization games is set. If there is a previously displayed number of remaining specialization games, the current number of remaining specialization games is subtracted from that value.

In step S3423, it is determined whether or not any one of the condition device numbers 1 to 4 is internally elected. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3425; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3427.

At step S3425, an aim effect (effect to urge the player to aim for a specific role) is set. Specifically, when conditional device numbers 1 and 2 are internally won, the operation order of the right first stop and a performance urged to aim at the BAR pattern are set, and when the conditional device numbers 3 and 4 are internally won, the performance is set in the operation order of right first stop and the performance urged to aim at the seven 2 pattern. Incidentally, instead of the BAR symbol or the Seven 2 symbol, there may be a case in which an effect aiming at the Seven 1 symbol is executed. After this process, the flow advances to step S3427.

In step S3427, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining specialization games is zero. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3429; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3431.

In step S3429, a specialized zone end effect (an effect indicating that the specialized zone has ended) is set. Incidentally, the special zone end effect set here is executed at the timing after all the reels are stopped.

At step S3431, effects other than those described above are appropriately set, and the process for setting effects during specialization ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, details of the game state update command processing (step S343) when the game state update command is received in the command processing of FIG. 91(d) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the game state update command process (step S343) when the game state update command is received in FIG. 91(d).

First, in step S3A01 executed first, the game information included in the game state update command is obtained, and the process proceeds to step S3A03. The information to be acquired here includes information such as internal winning condition device number, winning combination determination result, game state, state B flag, pt high probability flag, 1000 pt reach flag, number of additional games by conditional additional clear.

In step S3A03, the information obtained in step S3A01 is referenced to determine whether or not the gaming state is the AT state. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3A05; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3A11.

In step S3A05, the information acquired in step S3A01 is referenced to determine whether or not the conditional addition flag is set to ON. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3A07; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3A21.

In step S3A07, a process of updating the conditional additional effect is executed. Here, when the set condition is established, the display of the portion corresponding to the condition is updated. After that, the process proceeds to step S3A21.

In step S3A11, the information obtained in step S3A01 is referenced to determine whether or not the game state is the special zone. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3A13; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3A21.

In step S3A13, it is determined whether or not the aiming effect (step S3425 in FIG. 96(b)) has been executed. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3A15; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3A21.

In step S3A15, it is determined whether or not any of the replay combinations 6, 10, 15 and 16 has been won. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3A17; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3A19.

In step S3A17, a success effect is set to indicate that the symbol indicated by the aiming effect has been successfully stopped, and further, an effect to add the number of remaining AT games is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S3A21. It should be noted that a value smaller than the actual value may be displayed for the addition of the number of remaining AT games. In this case, the number of remaining AT games displayed is smaller than the actual value, but when the AT state is restored, the actual number of remaining AT games is displayed (step S3401 in FIG. 96(a)), so the actual number of additional games can be grasped at that time.

In step S3A19, a failure effect is set to indicate that the symbol shown in the aim effect has failed to stop. After that, the process proceeds to step S3A21. Since this failure effect is executed even if the remaining AT game number is added (step S1423 in FIG. 81(b)), the displayed AT remaining game number may be smaller than the actual value. In this case, since the actual number of AT remaining games is displayed when returning to the AT state (step S3401 in FIG. 96(a)), the actual number of additional games can be grasped at that time.

In step S3A21, in addition to the processing described above, processing upon receiving the game state update command (including, for example, processing for setting an effect according to each game state) is executed, and this game state update command processing is terminated. Note that the processing here includes processing for initializing the display pt to 0 when the state B is shifted to the state A. FIG.

<<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a flow chart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 98(b) is a flow chart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 98(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG. FIG. 98(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-controller 500. FIG.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 98(a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, input/output port initialization processing, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable reaches 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 .

In step S409, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading other effect data from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control instruction in the performance data read out in step S409, the image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control is performed on display images (notification images, background images). This image control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 98(d). When this image control processing ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 98(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-controller 500 detects the strobe signal output by the first sub-controller 400 . In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-controller 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 98(c). The second sub-control unit 500 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the third embodiment), and is triggered by this timer interrupt to execute timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 98(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S411 in the main processing of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 98(d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518 . As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets an instruction to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504 .

In step S423, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S425, otherwise, it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S425, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 of image data information (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) forming the display image. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504 .

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S431, otherwise, it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S431, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Description of operation>>
The features of the above-described slot machine 100 will be described below using an operation example. In the following figures, the item "number of games" indicates the period from the start operation of the game (operation of the start lever 135) to the start operation of the next game as one game period.

[Example of normal operation]
[Example of operation (F1): When transitioning from a state other than the normal state to the normal state]
First, in the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, the flow when shifting from a state other than the normal state to the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing an example of operation when transitioning from CZ to normal state. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed by the effect image display device 157 according to the timing chart shown in FIG. The operation when the power is turned on will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 109. FIG.

In the example of FIG. 99, the first game is the last game of CZ (the number of CZ remaining games is 0), and the AT lottery is not won. In this game, as shown in FIG. 100(a), an effect (CZ end effect) indicating that the AT lottery was not won in the final game of CZ is executed (FIG. 95). In the first game, the state B end flag is set to ON (step S1C11 in FIG. 86), and further, when the game ends, the parameters of state B are initialized and state A is set (step S119 in FIG. 72, step S1A23 in FIG. 84, step S1E21 in FIG. 88). In addition, in the first sub-control section 400, the value of display pt is initialized to 0 due to the transition from state B to state A (step S3A21 in FIG. 97). FIG. 99 shows that state B has been shifted to state A by the above-described processing, and that the cumulative winning pt, pt high-probability remaining game number, and display pt have been initialized to zero.

The second game is the normal state and state A, and as shown in FIG. 100(b), the background corresponding to the normal state (normal mode) and the display pt value (here, 0) are displayed (FIG. 94(b)). In state A (state B flag off), state B shift lottery (step S1003 in FIG. 73) is executed, but since no winning combination is internally won in the second game, the lottery is not won and the game ends.

In the following third game, condition device number 8 is internally won, so that state B shift lottery is won, the state B flag is set to ON, and state B preparation processing is executed (steps S1005 to S1019 in FIG. 73). FIG. 99 shows that in the third game, the state is shifted from state A to state B, and that 10 is set as the number of pt high-probability remaining games. At the end of the third game, the pt high probability flag is set to ON (step S1B15 in FIG. 85), and the high probability mode is set from the next game. Also, the effect executed in the third game is the same as in the second game (FIG. 100(b)).

The fourth game is the normal state (high probability mode) and state B. In this state, a pt lottery (high-probability mode) is executed at the start of the game, and the number of pt high-probability remaining games is decremented by 1 (here, it becomes 9) (steps S1243 and S1253 in FIG. 77). In the pt lottery (high-probability mode) here, 10 is derived as the winning pt because no winning combination is internally won. By adding the acquired pt, the value of the cumulative acquired pt becomes 10 (step S1247 in FIG. 77), and further, the value of the display pt of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes 10 according to the information of the acquired pt (step S3217 in FIG. 94(b)). FIG. 100(c) shows that, in the effect corresponding to the normal state (high probability mode), the acquired pt is surrounded by a circle (+10 here), the display pt (here, the same value as the cumulative acquired pt) is displayed in the upper left (here, 10 is displayed), and the pt high-probability remaining game number is displayed in the upper right (here, 9 remaining) (steps S3213, S3217, and S32 in FIG. 94(b)). 27).

In the fifth game, the normal state (high-probability mode) and state B continue, a pt lottery (high-probability mode) is executed at the start of the game, and the number of pt high-probability remaining games is subtracted by 1 (here, 8) (steps S1243 and S1253 in FIG. 77). In the 5th game, 100 is derived as the winning pt by internally winning the condition device number 6. By adding the acquired pt, the value of the cumulative acquired pt becomes 110 (step S1247 in FIG. 77), and further, the value of the display pt of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes 110 according to the information of the acquired pt (step S3217 in FIG. 94(b)).

Suppose that the normal state (high probability mode) and state B continue from the 6th game onward, and when the 13th game is started, the value of the number of pt high probability remaining games is subtracted to 0, the value of accumulated acquisition pt is 260, and the value of display pt is 260.例文帳に追加In FIG. 100(d), in the effect corresponding to the normal state (high probability mode), the acquired pt is displayed in a circle (+10 here), the display pt (the same value as the cumulative acquired pt here) is displayed in the upper left (here, 260 is displayed), and the number of pt high probability remaining games is displayed in the upper right (here, the remaining 0 is displayed) (steps S3213, S3217, and S3 in FIG. 94(b)). 227).

At the end of the 13th game, the number of pt high-probability remaining games becomes 0, but if the pt high-probability set number is not 0 at this time, the high-probability mode continues, and if the pt high-probability set number is 0, the pt high-probability flag is set off and the mode shifts to the normal mode (step S1B13 in FIG. 85). Here, since the pt high-probability set number is 0, the mode shifts to the normal mode, and the normal state (normal mode) effect is set as the effect of the 14th game, which is the next game (FIG. 94(b)). FIG. 100(e) shows that the background corresponding to the normal state (normal mode) and the value of display pt (here, 260) are displayed.

[Operation example (F2): When the cumulative acquisition pt reaches 1000]
Next, in the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, the flow when the cumulative winning pt reaches 1000 in the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. FIG. FIG. 101 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation when the cumulative acquisition pt reaches 1000 in the normal state. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed by the effect image display device 157 according to the timing chart shown in FIG.

In the example of FIG. 101, the first game is in the normal state (normal mode) and state B, the cumulative acquired pt and display pt at the end of the game are both 900, and the number of pt high-probability remaining games is 0. In this game, as shown in FIG. 102(a), the background corresponding to the normal state (normal mode) and the display pt value (here, 900) are displayed (step S3227 in FIG. 94(b)). In the following second game, no pt is acquired, the cumulative acquired pt and the display pt are maintained as they are, and the contents of the effect are also maintained as they are.

In the following third game, it is assumed that the number of pt high-probability sets lottery is won and 1 is added to the number of pt high-probability sets (step S1207 in FIG. 76). In this case, the pt high-probability flag is set to ON, and the mode shifts to the high-probability mode (step S1209 in FIG. 76). Then, after the pt (here, 20) acquired in the pt lottery (high probability mode) is added to the total acquired pt (steps S1243 and S1247 in FIG. 77), the value of the number of pt high probability remaining games is set because the number of pt high probability sets is 1 (Yes in step S1255 in FIG. 77). These pieces of information are sent to the first sub-controller 400 (step S1041 in FIG. 73), and the display pt value of the first sub-controller 400 becomes 920 (step S3217 in FIG. 94(b)). In FIG. 102(b), in the effect corresponding to the normal state (high probability mode), the acquired pt is displayed in a circle (+20 here), the display pt (the same value as the cumulative acquired pt here) is displayed in the upper left (here, 920 is displayed), and the number of pt high probability remaining games is displayed in the upper right (here, the remaining 9 is displayed) (steps S3213, S3217, and S3 in FIG. 94(b)). 227).

In the fourth game, the normal state (high-probability mode) and state B continue, the pt lottery (high-probability mode) is executed at the start of the game, and the number of pt high-probability remaining games is subtracted by 1 (here, 8) (steps S1243 and S1253 in FIG. 77). In the fourth game, 100 is derived as the winning pt by internally winning the condition device number 6. By adding this acquired pt, the cumulative acquired pt value becomes 1020 (step S1247 in FIG. 77), and the value of the display pt of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes 1020 according to the acquired pt information (step S3217 in FIG. 94(b)). In FIG. 102(c), in the effect corresponding to the normal state (high probability mode), the acquired pt is displayed in a circle (+100 here), the display pt (the same value as the cumulative acquired pt here) is displayed in the upper left (here, 1020 is displayed), and the number of pt high probability remaining games is displayed in the upper right (remaining 8 is displayed here) (steps S3213 and S3217 in FIG. 94(b)). S3227).

In the above example, the cumulative acquired pt reaches 1000 in the fourth game. When the cumulative acquired pt reaches 1000 and the number of pt high probability remaining games is 0, the 1000pt reaching flag is set to ON (step S1237 in FIG. 76), and the CZ lottery and AT lottery are executed in the subsequent game (Yes in step S1201 in FIG. 76). By this processing, the CZ lottery and the AT lottery are postponed while continuing the high probability mode until the number of pt high probability remaining games becomes 0 to obtain more pts. Since the number of pt high-probability remaining games is not 0 in the fourth game, the high-probability mode continues.

It is assumed that the normal state (high probability mode) and state B continue after the fifth game, and when the 12th game is started, the value of the number of pt high-probability remaining games is subtracted to become 0, the value of the cumulative acquisition pt becomes 1230, and the value of the display pt becomes 1230.例文帳に追加In FIG. 102(d), in the effect corresponding to the normal state (high probability mode), the acquired pt is displayed in a circle (+10 here), the display pt (the same value as the cumulative acquired pt here) is displayed in the upper left (here, 1230 is displayed), and the number of pt high probability remaining games is displayed in the upper right (remaining 0 is displayed here) (steps S3213, S3217, and step S in FIG. 94(b). 3227).

When the number of pt high probability remaining games becomes 0 in the 12th game, the 1000 pt reach flag is set to ON (step S1237 in FIG. 76). Upon receiving this information, the first sub-control section 400 once executes the normal state (normal mode) effect at the end of the game (the reels 110 to 112 stop or the payout ends) (step S3A21 in FIG. 97). FIG. 102(e) shows that the background corresponding to the normal state (normal mode) and the value of display pt (here, 1230) are displayed. In the third embodiment, the display pt is displayed in a hatched state so that it is easy to understand that the display pt exceeds 1,000. This display is not limited as long as it can be understood that the displayed value has reached a predetermined value.

In the following 13th game, when the game starts, the CZ lottery and the AT lottery are executed, 1000 is subtracted from the accumulated pt (here, 230), the 1000pt reach flag and the pt high probability flag are set to off, and the value of the pt high probability set number is cleared to 0 (Yes in step S1201 in FIG. 76). On the other hand, in the first sub-control unit 400, the lottery effect is executed, and the value of the display pt is set to the value of the current accumulated acquisition pt (here, 230) (step S3221 in FIG. 94(b)). FIG. 102(f) shows an example of the start of the lottery effect, and FIG. 102(g) shows an example of the case where the content indicating that the CZ lottery is won is displayed by the lottery effect.

By winning the CZ lottery in the 13th game, the game state shifts to CZ at the end of the game (step S1B07 in FIG. 85), and CZ starts from the next game. FIG. 101 shows that the transition to CZ starts from the 14th game.

[Example of operation (F3): When settings are changed]
In the third embodiment, a loop of shifting from the normal state to the CZ and AT states and returning to the normal state is repeated (see FIG. 70). Among them, in the normal state, the game can be enjoyed by acquiring pts for shifting to the CZ or AT state, and after shifting to the CZ or AT state, the game can be enjoyed by acquiring more profits.

In the above loop, when the CZ or AT state ends and shifts to state A, the parameters related to state B are initialized and state A becomes the most unfavorable state. In order to prevent such a situation, the third embodiment employs a configuration in which the stay period in state A is set shorter (easier to transition) than state B, and the high probability mode is set immediately after transition from state A to state B (see operation example (F1)). Note that such a configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the high probability mode is always set, and a configuration in which the high probability mode is more likely to be set immediately after the transition from state A to state B than at other times may be adopted.

Furthermore, the state A is set as an initial state at the time of shipment from the factory or after a setting change in the third embodiment. That is, after the setting is changed, a series of operations occur in which the state A is shifted to the state B and the high probability mode is set. Given that setting changes are generally made outside of business hours, such an operation is easy to grasp when the store opens, and there is a risk that the presence or absence of setting changes may be inferred from this. In order to prevent such a situation, the third embodiment adopts a configuration in which the same effect as in the normal mode is performed without executing the effect corresponding to the high probability mode for the first time after the setting change. This operation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. FIG. 103 is a timing chart showing an example of operation after setting change. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed by the effect image display device 157 according to the timing chart shown in FIG.

In the example of FIG. 103, the first game is the first game after the setting change. The state after the setting change is the normal state and state A, and the values of the accumulated pt and the number of pt high-probability remaining games are 0 (step S101 in FIG. 72). On the other hand, in the first sub-control unit 400, the normal state effect is executed as shown in FIG. 104(a) by the initial setting after the power is turned on, and the value of the display pt is set to 0 (step S301 in FIG. 91). Also, in this initial setting, the first morning flag is set to ON. In the state A (state B flag off), state B transition lottery (step S1003 in FIG. 73) is executed, but since no winning combination is internally won in the first game, the lottery is not won and the game ends.

In the following second game, the condition device number 8 is internally won, so that the state B shift lottery is won, the state B flag is set to ON, and the state B preparation process is executed (steps S1005 to S1019 in FIG. 73). FIG. 103 shows that state A is shifted to state B in the second game, and 10 is set as the number of pt high-probability remaining games. At the end of the second game, the pt high probability flag is set to ON (step S1B15 in FIG. 85), and the high probability mode is set from the next game. Also, the effect executed in the second game is the same as in the first game (FIG. 104(a)).

The third game is the normal state (high probability mode) and state B. In this state, a pt lottery (high-probability mode) is executed at the start of the game, and the number of pt high-probability remaining games is decremented by 1 (here, it becomes 9) (steps S1243 and S1253 in FIG. 77). In the pt lottery (high probability mode) here, 100 is derived as the acquired pt by internally winning the condition device number 6. By adding this acquired pt, the value of the cumulative acquired pt becomes 100 (step S1247 in FIG. 77).

Here, when the first flag in the morning is not ON, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the normal medium effect setting process (FIG. 94(b)), and the effect corresponding to the normal state mode is executed (FIGS. 99 to 102). In this case, the value of the acquired pt is reflected in the display pt. However, since the first morning flag is set to ON after the setting change, the first morning effect setting process (FIG. 94(a)) is executed without executing the normal middle effect setting process.

In the first morning effect setting process, the background in the normal state is maintained, and the false pt addition effect is executed (step S3203 in FIG. 94(a)). In this fake pt addition effect, a lottery similar to the pt lottery executed by the main control unit 300 in the normal mode (step S1245 in FIG. 77) is performed, and the pt derived here is used. In other words, regardless of the presence or absence of the actual acquisition pt and its value, it is an effect to make it appear that the normal mode is set. Here, it is assumed that 50 is derived by the pt lottery in the first sub-control unit 400 in the third game, and that the display pt value is 50 using this. FIG. 104(b) shows that when the actual state is the normal state (high probability mode) and the acquired pt is 100, the normal state (normal mode) effect is performed, where the pt derived by the first sub-control unit 400 is displayed in a circle (+50 in this case), and the display pt (here, a value different from the cumulative acquired pt) is displayed in the upper left (here, 50 is displayed) (step S3203 in FIG. 94(a)). ).

Thereafter, while the first morning flag is set to ON, the false pt addition effect is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the actual acquired pt and its value. Here, it is assumed that before the number of high-probability remaining games becomes 0, the lottery for number of high-probability sets (step S1203 in FIG. 76) is won and two high-probability sets are obtained (equivalent to 20 high-probability remaining games). Assume that the high-probability mode continues over a total of 30 games due to the acquisition of this pt high-probability set number, and the value of the cumulative acquisition pt is 510 and the value of the display pt is 80 at the end of the 32nd game after the setting change. At this time, since both the number of pt high-probability sets and the number of pt high-probability remaining games are 0, the pt high-probability flag is set to OFF, and the normal mode is entered from the 33rd game, which is the next game.

In the 33rd game, the conditions for canceling the first-morning flag (30 or more games have passed since the power was turned on, and the normal mode (pt high-probability flag is off) in the normal state) are satisfied, so the first-morning flag is set to off (step S3011 in FIG. 92). As a result, the normal effect setting process (FIG. 94(b)) is executed in the first sub-control unit 400, and the effect corresponding to the normal state mode is executed. For example, in the 35th game, the pt high-probability set number lottery is won and the high-probability mode is entered. In this case, as shown in FIG.

[Example of operation (F4): When the power is turned on without changing the settings]
State A is set as an initial state at the time of shipment from the factory or after a setting change in the third embodiment. That is, after the setting is changed, a series of operations occur in which state A is shifted to state B and the high probability mode is set. Given that setting changes are generally made outside of business hours, such an operation is easy to grasp when the store opens, and there is a risk that the presence or absence of setting changes may be inferred from this. On the other hand, even if the setting is not changed, the mode may shift to the high probability mode, and the player who sees the effect corresponding to this may misunderstand whether the setting has been changed and suffer a disadvantage. Therefore, in the third embodiment, even if the high probability mode is entered for 30 games after the power is turned on, the corresponding effect is not executed, and the same effect as in the normal mode is performed. This operation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. FIG. 105 is a timing chart showing an example of operation when power is turned on without changing settings. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed by the effect image display device 157 according to the timing chart shown in FIG.

In the example of FIG. 105, the first game is the first game after the power is turned on. The state at the time of the power failure is the normal state and state B, the cumulative winning pt is 500, and the value of the number of pt high probability remaining games is 0 (pt high probability flag off, normal mode). When the power is turned on, these values are reset. On the other hand, in the first sub-control unit 400, the normal state effect is executed as shown in FIG. 106(a) and the value of display pt is set to 0 (step S301 in FIG. 91). Also, in this initial setting, the first morning flag is set to ON.

Here, when the first flag in the morning is not ON, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the normal medium effect setting process (FIG. 94(b)), and the effect corresponding to the normal state mode is executed (FIGS. 99 to 102). In this case, the value of the acquired pt is reflected in the display pt. However, when the first morning flag is set to ON, the first morning effect setting process (FIG. 94(a)) is executed without executing the normal middle effect setting process.

In the first morning effect setting process, the background in the normal state is maintained, and the false pt addition effect is executed (step S3203 in FIG. 94(a)). In this fake pt addition effect, a lottery similar to the pt lottery executed by the main control unit 300 in the normal mode (step S1245 in FIG. 77) is performed, and the pt derived here is used. In other words, regardless of the presence or absence of the actual acquisition pt and its value, it is an effect to make it appear that the normal mode is set. Thereafter, while the first morning flag is set to ON, the false pt addition effect is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the actual acquired pt and its value.

For example, in the third game, conditional device number 6 is internally won, so the pt high-probability set number lottery is won and the game shifts to the high-probability mode, but FIG. In addition, FIG. 105 shows that the high probability mode is continued until the 12th game, then becomes the normal mode once, and then, in the 15th game, the mode shifts to the high probability mode again, but since the first morning flag remains on, the normal state effect (by the false pt addition effect) is executed.

In FIG. 105 described above, the case where the state at the time of power failure is the normal state (normal mode) has been described, but even if the state at the time of power failure is the high probability mode, the first morning flag is similarly set to ON and the false pt addition performance is executed. This case will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a timing chart showing an example of operation when power is turned on without changing settings.

In the example of FIG. 107, it is assumed that the 1st to 4th games are executed with the high-probability mode set, and the power is turned off at the end of the 4th game. The state at the time of the power failure is the normal state and state B, the cumulative winning pt is 720, and the pt high probability remaining game count is 3 (pt high probability flag on, high probability mode). When the power is turned on, these values are reset. On the other hand, in the first sub-control unit 400, the normal state effect is executed as shown in FIG. 106(a) and the value of display pt is set to 0 (step S301 in FIG. 91). Also, in this initial setting, the first morning flag is set to ON. As a result, the first morning effect setting process (FIG. 94(a)) is executed from the fifth game, and the false pt addition effect is executed. Comparing the states before the power failure and after the power recovery shows that the cumulative acquired pt and the display pt have the same value in the state before the power failure, but the cumulative acquired pt and the display pt have different values after the power recovery.

105 to 107 described above, the case where the power is cut off while the state B is set has been explained, but also in the case where the power is cut off while the state A is set, the first morning flag is set to ON in the same manner as the above example, and the false pt addition effect is executed. This case will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation when the power is turned on without changing the settings after the power is turned off in the state A. FIG.

In the third embodiment, when the state A is set, the cumulative acquisition pt remains 0 (pt is not acquired after pt is initialized to 0). That is, the values of the total acquisition pt and the display pt when the state A is set are both 0, and are the same before and after the power failure and power recovery. Also, in state A when the first morning flag is set to off, the normal mode effect (normal background) is set (step S3227 in FIG. 94), but the normal mode effect (normal background) is set even in the initial setting after the power failure and power recovery (step S301 in FIG. 91), so the normal mode effect is executed both before and after the power failure and power recovery. FIG. 108 shows that in the first game after the power is restored, the state is A, the cumulative acquisition pt and the display pt are both 0, and the normal state effect is set. Although the state before power failure is not shown, it is the same as the state after power restoration. Also, in the initial setting after the power is restored, the first thing in the morning flag is set to ON (step S301 in FIG. 91).

State A shifts to state B by a lottery (step S1003 in FIG. 73), but the expected value of the number of games played until winning the lottery is about 1.5, and state B shifts to state B after one or two games. However, this number is a theoretical value, and in some cases it may take more games. The example of FIG. 108 shows a case where no hand is internally won until the 9th game after power is restored, and state A continues for 10 games.

In the example of FIG. 108, it is assumed that the state B shift lottery is won by internally winning the condition device number 8 in the 10th game after the power is restored. As a result of this winning, the state B flag is set to ON, and preparation processing for state B is executed (steps S1005 to S1019 in FIG. 73). FIG. 108 shows that the state A is shifted to the state B in the tenth game, and that the number of pt high-probability remaining games is set to 10. FIG. At the end of the tenth game, the pt high probability flag is set to ON (step S1B15 in FIG. 85), and the high probability mode is set from the next game.

The 11th game is state B and normal state (high probability mode). Here, since the first morning flag is set to ON, the first morning effect setting process (FIG. 94(a)) is executed without executing the normal middle effect setting process. By this processing, the background in the normal state is maintained instead of the background corresponding to the current high probability mode, and the false pt addition effect is executed (step S3203 in FIG. 94(a)). That is, regardless of the presence or absence of the actual acquired pt and its value, an effect is executed to make it appear that the normal mode is set.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108, regardless of whether the state before the power failure is the normal mode or the high-probability mode, the performance corresponding to the normal mode (by the false pt addition performance) is executed when the power is turned on, so that the state at the time of the power failure (for example, the state at the end of the previous day) can be hidden, and the presence or absence of the setting change can be prevented from being guessed.

[Example of operation (F5): When the total earned pt reaches 1000 while there is a discrepancy between the total earned pt and the display pt]
According to the first morning flag described above, the false pt addition effect is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the actual acquired pt and its value. After the first morning flag is turned off, the pts acquired in each game are added to the display pts as usual, but the deviation remains as it is. This deviation is eliminated when the total earned pt reaches 1000 or when the state B ends (the state B is newly entered with both the total earned pt and the display pt being initialized).

Even if the display pt is less than 1000, if the cumulative acquired pt reaches 1000, a lottery such as a CZ lottery and a lottery effect are executed regardless of whether the first morning flag is on (step S1211 in FIG. 76, step S3221 in FIG. 94(b)). This operation will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation when the total earned pt reaches 1000 with a difference between the total earned pt and the display pt.

In the example of FIG. 109, the power is turned on again without changing the settings, and in the fifth game after the power is turned on, the cumulative acquired pt is 850 and the display pt is 100. Further, at this time, since the first morning flag is set to ON, the normal state effect is executed by the false pt addition effect.

In the sixth game, the lottery for the number of pt high-probability sets is won by internally winning the condition device number 6, and the mode is shifted to the high-probability mode, but the performance of the normal state is maintained by the false pt addition performance, and the value of the pt for display different from the actually acquired pt and the cumulative acquired pt is displayed. After that, this high-probability mode continues until the 15th game. Then, when the number of pt high-probability remaining games becomes 0 in the fifteenth game, the 1000 pt reaching flag is set to ON (step S1237 in FIG. 76).

In the following 16th game, when the game starts, the CZ lottery and the AT lottery are executed, 1000 is subtracted from the cumulative acquired pt (here, 90), the 1000pt reaching flag and the pt high probability flag are set to OFF, and the value of the pt high probability set number is cleared to 0 (Yes in step S1201 of FIG. 76). On the other hand, in the first sub-control unit 400, the first morning flag is set to OFF (step S3011 in FIG. 92), the lottery effect is executed by the normal effect setting process (FIG. 94(b)), and the value of the display pt is set to the current cumulative acquired pt value (here, 90) (step S3221 in FIG. 94(b)).

In the game after the 17th game, the first morning flag is set to OFF, and the difference between the total acquisition pt and the display pt is eliminated. In other words, the effect corresponding to the normal mode and the high-probability mode becomes executable, and the pt for display and the total acquisition pt match. FIG. 109 shows that the CZ lottery and AT lottery of the 16th game are not won, the 17th game of the next game is in the normal mode, and the mode is shifted to the high probability mode in the 18th game.

[Operation Example (F6): Another Configuration Applicable to First Morning Flag Release Condition]
As described in the above operation examples (F3) and (F4), the third embodiment employs a configuration that restricts the effects corresponding to the high probability mode after the power is turned on. Specifically, while the first morning flag is set to ON after the power is turned on, the effect corresponding to the high probability mode is restricted. The first morning flag is set to OFF when the release condition is satisfied. That is, the effect corresponding to the high-probability mode is restricted from power-on until the release condition is satisfied.

In the third embodiment, one of the cancellation conditions is "30 or more games have passed since the power was turned on, and the game is in the normal state and in the normal mode (pt high probability flag is off)" (step S3009 in FIG. 92). This cancellation condition may be, for example, a condition that is satisfied only by the number of games played since the power was turned on, such as "30 games have passed since the power was turned on". Note that the number of games here is not limited to the above example, and any value (eg, 10) can be used. Further, the above number of games is not limited to a fixed value, and may be determined by lottery or the like.

Also, the release condition is not limited to the release condition based on the number of games that have elapsed since the power was turned on, and a release condition that is satisfied regardless of the number of games may be employed. For example, it may be a condition that is satisfied when the first high-probability mode after power-on ends, or a condition that is satisfied when the first set high-probability mode ends after transitioning from state A to state B after power-on.

Furthermore, the release condition based on the number of games that have elapsed since the power was turned on may be combined with the release condition that is satisfied regardless of the number of games played. In this case, the performance corresponding to the high-probability mode may be restricted until both release conditions are met, or the performance corresponding to the high-probability mode may be restricted until either release condition is met.

In addition, since the situation is different when the setting value is changed and when the setting value is not changed, the release condition may be changed according to these situations. For example, when the set value is changed, the release condition that is satisfied when the first high probability mode ends is adopted, and if the set value is not changed, the release condition that is satisfied based on the number of games elapsed since the power is turned on may be adopted. Of course, a configuration using a common release condition as in the third embodiment may be used.

Further, some slot machines require a predetermined operation (for example, inserting a separately provided key and turning it to a predetermined position) when changing a setting value. Furthermore, when this predetermined operation is performed, the RAM may be cleared regardless of whether or not the set values have been changed. In the above description, the release condition may be changed depending on whether or not the setting value is changed. However, for such a slot machine, the release condition may be changed depending on whether or not a predetermined operation is performed.

By appropriately setting the cancellation conditions described above, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the setting has been changed.

[Operation Example (F7): Other Configuration Applicable for Operation in Normal State]
Other configurations applicable to the operation in the normal state described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 109 will be described below.

In the third embodiment, the CZ lottery and the AT lottery are executed by acquiring pts, and it can be said that the high probability mode in which pts are more likely to be acquired is advantageous to the player. This high-probability mode is configured to be managed using the pt high-probability set number and the pt high-probability remaining game number, but not limited to these parameters, any conditions can be adopted for the start and end of the high-probability mode.

Various configurations can be adopted for the number of pt high-probability sets and the number of pt high-probability remaining games described in the third embodiment. For example, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the pt high-probability set number lottery is executed regardless of whether or not the high-probability mode (pt high-probability flag is ON) is adopted, but the pt high-probability set number lottery may not be executed in the high-probability mode, or the high-probability mode may be configured to provide more (or less) pt high-probability set number lottery than the normal mode. Further, the number of pt high-probability sets to be provided is not limited to being determined by lottery, and may be set to a fixed value.

In addition, when shifting to state B or when subtracting 1 from the number of pt high-probability sets, 10 pt high-probability remaining games are given (step S1019 in FIG. 73, step S1259 in FIG. 77). Also, when shifting to the state B, instead of giving the number of pt high-probability remaining games, the number of pt high-probability sets may be given.

Further, in setting the number of pt high-probability sets and the number of pt high-probability remaining games, it may be determined by lottery whether to set or not, but it is preferable that the probability of transition to the high-probability mode when transitioning from state A to state B is higher than the probability of transition to the high-probability mode in the normal mode of state B. In the third embodiment, when transitioning from state A to state B, the transition to the 100% high probability mode is made, whereas in the normal mode of state B, the transition is made by lottery based on the condition device (the number of pt high probability sets is given). That is, the probability of transition to the high-probability mode (100%) when transitioning from state A to state B is higher than the probability of transition to the high-probability mode (less than 100%) in the normal mode of state B.

In addition, when shifting to the high probability mode, an indication period may be provided, and an indication effect may be executed during this period. In the portent period, the portent effect may not be executed if the first flag in the morning is on. Further, in the third embodiment, if the accumulated acquired pt has reached 1000 when the number of pt high-probability remaining games becomes 0, even if the number of pt high-probability sets remains, it is discarded and the CZ lottery or AT lottery is executed.

Further, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a CZ lottery or an AT lottery is executed by acquiring a pt, but in addition to this configuration, a CZ lottery or an AT lottery (direct hit lottery) may be executed regardless of the pt. For example, the configuration may be such that a direct lottery is executed according to a conditional device that is internally won, or an opportunity to execute the direct lottery may be provided when the state A shifts to the state B. In addition, the CZ lottery or AT lottery is not executed by acquiring pts, and the CZ lottery or AT lottery is executed regardless of pts, and the more pts acquired in this lottery, the more advantageous results can be obtained. Even with this configuration, it can be said that the high-probability mode in which pt can be obtained more easily is advantageous to the player. Incidentally, when winning the CZ lottery that is executed independently of the pt, the pt for display may not be displayed in the CZ.

In addition, an indication period may be provided in reporting the result of the CZ lottery or the AT lottery. In the high probability mode, when the first morning flag is turned on and the transition is made to the sign period, the false pt addition performance may be continued, the first morning flag may be set to OFF and the normal pt addition performance may be executed, or the pt for display may not be displayed. When a CZ lottery or an AT lottery that is executed independently of the pt is not won, when a configuration is adopted in which a normal state is returned without clearing the cumulative acquired pt, a configuration may be adopted in which the false pt addition performance is continued during these sign periods.

In the third embodiment, the first morning flag is set to ON when power is cut off and then restored. For example, in the event of a momentary power cut or multiple power cut due to a lightning strike during business hours, the first morning flag may be set to ON in accordance with the elapse of time from power cut to power restoration, for example, so that the effect can be taken over as it is (the first morning flag is not set to ON).

Further, the setting of the first flag in the morning may be determined by lottery. In the case of this configuration, the operation after power-on becomes unstable, and it may be possible to make it more difficult to guess whether or not the setting has been changed.

In the third embodiment, by facilitating transition from a state disadvantageous to the player such as state A to an advantageous state such as state B and a high-probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation to play even in a state disadvantageous to the player. Such an advantageous state is not limited to the high-probability mode, and may be, for example, the CZ or AT state, as long as it is a state in which the player can easily obtain a profit or a state in which the player can easily shift to such a state.

In the third embodiment, an effect corresponding to state B and high probability mode (high probability mode effect) is executed. Then, when the power is turned on after the setting is changed, the high-probability mode is entered at an early stage. With this configuration, if the high-probability mode effect is started early after the power is turned on, there is a risk that it will be easily guessed that the setting has been changed. In order to prevent such a situation, the third embodiment employs a configuration in which the first morning flag is set to ON when the power is turned on to execute the false pt addition effect. Since the execution of the high-probability mode effect is restricted by this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to guess whether or not the setting has been changed. It should be noted that this configuration is not limited to the presentation corresponding to the high-probability mode as long as it restricts the presentation that can be executed when the state B is shifted to. That is, by restricting the effect that can be executed in the state B when the power is turned on, it is possible to make it difficult to guess whether or not the setting has been changed. In the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted that restricts the execution of the high-probability mode effect not only when the setting is changed, but also when the setting is not changed. In addition, in the third embodiment, the execution of the first high-probability mode performance after the setting change is always restricted, but it is sufficient if the first execution of the high-probability mode performance is restricted, and as such a configuration, for example, a configuration in which the first morning flag is turned on by lottery when the power is turned on may be adopted.

Further, for example, when business is ended with the high-probability mode set on the previous day and business on the next day is started in that state, the state in which the high-probability mode is set is restored after the power is turned on. With this configuration, if the high-probability mode effect is started after the power is turned on, it may be easily guessed that the setting has not been changed. In order to prevent such a situation, the third embodiment employs a configuration in which the first morning flag is set to ON when the power is turned on to execute the false pt addition effect. Since the execution of the high-probability mode effect is restricted by this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to guess whether or not the setting has been changed. It should be noted that this configuration may be a configuration that restricts the performance executed corresponding to a certain state, and is not limited to the performance corresponding to the high-probability mode, and the certain state may be, for example, RT, advantageous section, chance zone, high probability, internal winning state, etc., and is not particularly limited. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to guess whether or not there is a setting change by restricting the effect that is executed for a certain state when the power is turned on. In the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the high probability mode is set at an early stage when the setting is changed, but even if such a configuration is not adopted, it is possible to make it difficult to guess whether the setting has been changed. Also, in the third embodiment, the execution of the high-probability mode effect after turning on the power is always restricted, but the execution of the high-probability mode effect may be restricted in some cases.

[Regarding conditional surcharge]
[Operation example (G1): Example of conditional addition]
In the slot machine 100 of the third embodiment, a conditional additional lottery is executed in the AT state. When this lottery is won, three conditions (hereinafter referred to as first clear condition to third clear condition) are set along with the addition amount of AT remaining game number (step S1409 in FIG. 81(a)), and when these conditions are established (cleared), the addition of the set AT remaining game number is executed (step S1D03 in FIG. 87(a)). Also, an effect related to this is executed in the first sub-control section 400 (step S3417 in FIG. 96(a), step S3A07 in FIG. 97). Hereinafter, the operation when winning the conditional addition will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing an example of winning the conditional addition lottery. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed by the effect image display device 157 according to the timing chart shown in FIG.

In the example of FIG. 110, it is assumed that the first game ends with the conditional addition flag turned off in the AT state, and in the following second game, the condition device number 10 is internally won, and the conditional addition lottery is won (step S1409 in FIG. 81(a)). FIG. 110 shows that the condition device number 10 is internally won in the second game, and that the conditional addition flag is set to ON by winning the conditional addition lottery. Here, as a result of the conditional addition lottery, 10 games are set as the number of additional games, internal winning of the condition device number 8 is set as the first clear condition, internal winning of the condition device number 9 is set as the second clear condition, and internal winning of the condition device number 10 is set as the third clear condition.

At this time, in the first sub-control unit 400, since the condition device number 10, which is the pressing order bell in the AT state, is internally won, the operation navigation indicating the correct operation order (right first stop) of the condition device number 10 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, as shown in FIG. 111(a). In addition, in the first sub-control unit 400, an image indicating that the conditional addition lottery has been won is displayed by turning on the conditional addition flag (step S3417 in FIG. 96(a)). FIG. 111(a) shows three circles TC displayed at the upper left in the display area of the effect image display device 157 as an example of this image. Of these three circles TC, the lower left circle corresponds to the first clear condition, the middle upper circle corresponds to the second clear condition, and the lower right circle corresponds to the third clear condition. The initial state of these circles is set to white, and when the corresponding clear condition is satisfied, the portion is determined at the end of the game and changed to a color corresponding to the amount of addition won in the conditional addition lottery (step S3A07 in FIG. 97). Specifically, when the amount of addition is 10 games and 20 games, the color changes to green, and when the amount of addition is 30 games and 100 games, the color changes to gold. That is, when all the three round TCs turn green or gold, all of the first clear condition to the third clear condition are cleared, and the number of AT remaining games is added. At the start of the second game, all the circles are white because it has not been determined that each clear condition has been met. The determination timing of whether the clear condition is established is not particularly limited, and may be determined before the reels are stopped, for example.

In this second game, it is assumed that eight medals have been obtained (net increase of five medals) by operating according to the operation navigation. Here, in the first sub-control unit 400, when the third clear condition is satisfied, the lower right circle among the three circles TC changes to green as shown in FIG.

It is assumed that the condition device number 9 is internally won in the third game. FIG. 110 shows that the condition device number 9 was internally won in the third game. In addition, in the first sub-control unit 400, since the conditional device number 9, which is the pressing order bell in the AT state, is internally won, as shown in FIG. In the third game, it is assumed that 8 medals are obtained (net increase of 5 medals) by operating according to the operation navigation. Here, in the first sub-control unit 400, when the second clear condition is established, the middle upper circle among the three circles TC changes as shown in FIG.

It is assumed that the condition device number 8 is internally won in the fourth game. FIG. 110 shows that the condition device number 8 was internally won in the fourth game. In addition, in the first sub-control unit 400, since the conditional device number 8, which is the push order bell in the AT state, is internally won, as shown in FIG. In the fourth game, it is assumed that 8 medals are obtained (net increase of 5 medals) by operating according to the operation navigation. Here, in the first sub-control unit 400, when the first clear condition is satisfied, the lower left circle among the three circles TC changes as shown in FIG.

Furthermore, when all the three circle TCs turn green (all the first clear condition to the third clear condition are cleared), the three circle TCs blink as shown in FIG. 111(g), and further, as shown in FIG. Furthermore, when this predetermined button is pressed, the three round TCs disappear as shown in FIG. 111(i), and the amount of addition won in conditional addition winning is displayed, and the number of AT remaining games is added. When this addition is made, the conditional addition flag is set to OFF (step S1D05 in FIG. 87(a)).

In the following 5th game, it is assumed that the conditional device number 10 is internally won, and that the conditional additional lottery is newly won (step S1409 in FIG. 81(a)). FIG. 110 shows that the condition device number 10 was internally won in the fifth game, and that the conditional addition flag is set to ON again by winning the conditional addition lottery. Here, as a result of the conditional addition lottery, 30 games are set as the number of additional games, internal winning of the condition device number 8 is set as the first clear condition, internal winning of the condition device number 9 is set as the second clear condition, and internal winning of the condition device number 10 is set as the third clear condition.

At this time, in the first sub-control unit 400, since the condition device number 10, which is the pressing order bell in the AT state, is internally won, the operation navigation indicating the correct operation order (right first stop) of the condition device number 10 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 as shown in FIG. 111 (j). In addition, in the first sub-control section 400, when the conditional addition flag is turned on, three circles TC are displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the effect image display device 157 as in FIG. 111(a). At the start of the fifth game, all the circles are white because it has not been determined that each clear condition has been met.

In this fifth game, it is assumed that eight medals are obtained (net increase of five medals) by operating according to the operation navigation. Here, in the first sub-control unit 400, when the third clear condition is satisfied, the lower right circle among the three circles TC changes to gold as shown in FIG.

FIG. 110 shows the 6th to 9th games, and shows that the first clear condition and the second clear condition are not satisfied during this period. In the 9th game, the condition device number 10, which is the 3rd clear condition, is internally won again, but at this point the 3rd clear condition has already been cleared, and the color of the three round TCs does not change at least from the 6th game to the 9th game.

[Operation Example (G2): Other Configurations for Conditional Addition]
In the examples of FIGS. 110 and 111 described above, when the first clear condition to the third clear condition (in the example of FIG. 110, the condition device numbers 8 to 10 are to be internally elected), the number of AT remaining games is added. In addition, a privilege image corresponding to the added amount to be given (in the example of FIG. 111, all green or gold circles TC) is prepared, and a part corresponding to the above first clear condition to third clear condition is set for this privilege image, and when any one of the first clear condition to third clear condition is cleared, the part corresponding to the cleared condition is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by making the player expect an addition each time the first to third clear conditions are cleared. Also, as the first clear condition to the third clear condition are cleared, the privilege image is gradually displayed.

In the examples of FIGS. 110 and 111, the configuration in which three clear conditions, ie, the first clear condition to the third clear condition, are provided and associated with the three portions of the privilege image has been described. Here, the configuration for gradually displaying the privilege image by varying the establishment timing of the clear condition is not limited to the above configuration, and it is sufficient that the clear condition is associated with each of a plurality of portions of the privilege image. Also, the timing of association is not limited to the timing at which the clear condition is set. For example, it may be configured to determine which part to display at the timing when any clear condition is met. Also, the criteria for determination are not particularly limited, and, for example, the configuration may be such that the corresponding portions are determined at random.

In the examples of FIGS. 110 and 111, as the clear condition corresponding to one part of the privilege image, a condition that is established according to the winning internal winning combination is adopted, but the content of this clear condition is not limited to the above example, and various conditions can be adopted. For example, in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111, the configuration in which the internal winning of the push-order bell is the clearing condition has been described, but a configuration other than the push-order bell may be used as the clear condition for part or all of the game. Further, the condition may be established by a winning combination instead of an internal winning combination or by a stop mode of the reel, a condition established by the result of some lottery executed by the main control unit 300, a condition established by a game history such as the number of games played or winning history of a combination, or a condition established by the elapsed time in the game. Furthermore, the condition may be established according to operation conditions (operation details) such as the operating means operated, the order of operation, and the timing of operation, or the condition may be established according to the lottery result for each game (including the lottery result over a plurality of games) regardless of such operations, or the condition may be established by combining the lottery result for each game and the player's operation. Note that the operation means is not limited to the various operation means provided in the third embodiment, and for example, operation means for presentation may be used. By associating the clear condition with the operation condition, it is possible to give enjoyment to the operation. Further, for example, there may be a common requirement among the clear conditions corresponding to each part, such as a configuration in which, after winning a conditional add-on, the first clear condition is satisfied by the first internal winning of the condition device number 8, the second clear condition is satisfied by the second internal winning of the condition device number 8, and the third clear condition is satisfied by the third internal winning of the condition device number 8, or the first clear condition and the second clear condition are satisfied by the internal winning of the same condition device number.

For example, there may be cases where all the clear conditions are met in one game regardless of whether the clear conditions are the same or different, cases where the clear conditions corresponding to each part are different but are met at the same timing, or cases where the plurality of clear conditions become the same due to a lottery, but at least if the clear conditions are met at different timings, it is possible to show the player the action of gradually displaying the privilege image.

Furthermore, in the examples of FIGS. 110 and 111, the cleared state of the clear condition is maintained as it is, but the cleared state may be reset later, for example, by providing a valid period to the cleared state, or another clear condition may be reset. Also, the clear condition may be changed in the middle, such as by providing a valid period for the clear condition.

In the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which an increase in the number of AT remaining games is obtained when a conditional addition is cleared, but the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of AT remaining games is added when the condition is cleared, and a configuration in which advantageous benefits for the player (shifting to an advantageous state, extending the period of an already set advantageous state, etc.) may be obtained. In addition to such benefits, for example, the configuration may be such that information related to the gaming machine such as setting values of the gaming machine and internal game status is notified or suggested. Furthermore, for example, when a user-specific environment is provided on a gaming machine, information unrelated to the game, such as image data and music data for customization, or information such as images and music that can be downloaded to a portable terminal owned by the player, may be notified. Furthermore, it may be a combination of these.

In addition, the privilege is not limited to the configuration that can be acquired without fail when the condition is cleared, and there may be cases where the privilege cannot be acquired when the condition is cleared, such as a configuration in which the privilege can be acquired according to the set acquisition probability. Furthermore, even when the conditional addition lottery is not won, the same effect as when the lottery is won may be executed.

In addition, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the amount of addition is determined in advance in the conditional addition lottery, but a configuration may be adopted in which the privilege is determined when the clear condition is first met. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can change the privilege determined in advance on the way. In this case, a privilege image that matches the privilege before the change may be used, or the privilege image may be changed according to the privilege after the change.

In the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the clear condition determination process is interrupted when moving to a specialized zone after winning a conditional addition (restarts when returning to the AT state), but the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and the clear condition determination may be continued as it is when transitioning to another game state. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a benefit is given according to the clear condition that is established when the game state is changed. Furthermore, another conditional addition may be started again when the original game state is resumed. Also, in the third embodiment, the conditional addition ends once, but for example, when it ends, a lottery is held to determine whether to continue or not. Further, the conditional additional lottery may be executed at the start of the AT, or a new conditional additional lottery may be executed immediately after the privilege of the conditional additional lottery is obtained.

In the third embodiment, when the AT state ends (shifts to a normal state) without satisfying all the clear conditions, the privilege that can be obtained if all the clear conditions are satisfied is not obtained. However, when the AT state ends, a configuration may be adopted in which a privilege corresponding to a clear condition that has been satisfied halfway is given. For example, if two of the three circled TCs in FIG. 111 are gold, 10 games may be added (in this case, the number of remaining AT games becomes 10, and the three circled TCs disappear). When adopting this configuration, it is preferable that the benefit obtained when the clear condition is satisfied halfway is less than the benefit obtained when the clear condition is fully satisfied (disadvantageous to the player).

In the example of FIG. 111, an example has been described in which the colors shown in FIGS. 112(a) and (b) are associated with the number of winable additional games. Specifically, when three round TCs are the same color, 10 or 20 games are added to the number of AT remaining games if green, and 30 or 100 games are added to gold. In the example of FIG. 111, only the modes shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b) are used, but if, for example, the colors are not all the same but different colors are included, there may be a case where the results are not added (addition failure). In the example of FIG. 112(c), the lower left and lower right of the three circle TCs are green, and the middle upper part is gold, and when this privilege image is displayed, there is a 20% probability that the number of remaining AT games will be added by 10 games (addition failure with a probability of 80%). In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a large reward is given when three circle TCs are combined in a specific color, and information such as setting suggestions may be included in addition to the addition. The example of FIG. 112(d) shows an example in which each of the three round TCs has a different color, and when this privilege image is displayed, the number of AT remaining games is added by 100 games, suggesting that the set value is one of 456.

Also, it may be configured to suggest a clear condition corresponding to each portion of the three circle TCs. In the example of FIG. 112(e), the part where the katakana character "chi" is displayed indicates that the internal winning of the cherry is the clear condition, the part where the katakana character "su" is displayed indicates that the internal winning of the watermelon is the clearing condition, and the part where the katakana character "be" is displayed indicates that the pushing order bell (or common bell) is the clearing condition. In this example, since the part where the katakana character "be" is displayed is in the lower left, it also suggests that internal winning of the left 1st bell is a clearing condition. In this way, when suggesting the clear condition, it may be configured to suggest not only the notation but also the position. Also, the portion where the katakana characters are not displayed may be used as a suggestion of some kind of internal winning (for example, the push order bell). Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a clear condition different from the actual clear condition is added and suggested. Furthermore, it is not limited to suggesting all the clearing conditions, and may suggest some of the clearing conditions. In the example of FIG. 112(e), the relationship between the clear conditions and the corresponding parts is clarified. With such a configuration that indicates the clear condition, the player can be made aware of the clear condition, and can be given the pleasure of, for example, challenging the clear condition if it can be established. In addition, by clarifying the part corresponding to the clear condition, it is possible to give the enjoyment of aiming at the part you want to display.

Also, the configuration may be such that information about the content of the privilege is suggested separately from the privilege image. FIG. 112(f) shows an example in which "Reward 10G" is displayed under three round TCs, suggesting that an extra 10 games are set as a privilege. In addition, FIG. 112(g) shows an example in which "50%" is displayed under the three round TCs, suggesting that the probability of obtaining the privilege is 50%. In addition, the timing at which such suggestion is made may be delayed and the timing may be indicated. FIG. 112(h) shows an example indicating that "5G remaining" is displayed under the three circle TCs, suggesting that the content of the benefit will be displayed after 5 games. In addition, the configuration may be such that information about the content of the privilege is suggested at the timing when a predetermined number of clear conditions are met or at the timing when a specific condition among the clear conditions is met. FIG. 112(i) shows an example of displaying "Reward 10G" similar to FIG. 112(f) at the timing when one of the clear conditions is met (one of the three round TCs changes).

Also, the privilege image is not limited to the three circle TCs shown in FIGS. 111 and 112(a) to (d), and various images can be used. For example, FIGS. 112(j) to 112(p) show examples of using characters as privilege images.

First, in the examples of FIGS. 112(j) to (l), FIG. 112(j) is the privilege image corresponding to the privilege of winning the additional 10 games with a probability of 50%, FIG. 112(k) is the privilege image corresponding to the privilege of winning the extra 10 games with the probability of 100%, and FIG. These privilege images have FIG. 112(j) as a basic form (image in which only the main character is displayed). It should be noted that the main character represents an addition of 10 games or more. 112(k), or the upper left and upper right of FIG. 112(l), one star mark confirms the addition, and two star marks confirms the addition of at least 30 games. In other words, it is configured to display different privilege contents depending on the number of star marks. It should be noted that if the portion without the star mark is displayed first, it can be expected that a more advantageous benefit will be given. In this way, when a plurality of privilege images have a common part, when the common part is displayed, the player can be entertained by making them guess the contents of the privilege to some extent and giving them a sense of expectation. It should be noted that this configuration is only an example, and the content of the benefits may change according to the location of the star marks, such as a configuration in which a star mark on the left part increases the odds, and a star mark on the right part increases the number of additional games, or that the higher the display position of the star mark is, the more advantageous the benefit is obtained. Also, the privilege may be configured to differ according to the color of the star mark.

In the examples of FIGS. 112(m) and (n), FIG. 112(m) is the privilege image corresponding to the privilege of winning the additional 100 games with a probability of 100%, and FIG. These privilege images are examples using a princess character showing a privilege more advantageous than the basic form (image in which only the main character is displayed) of FIG. 112(j). This princess character indicates that the addition of 100 games or more has been confirmed. Also, the Haniwa character displayed at the bottom left of the privilege image in FIG. 112(n) suggests that the set value is 456, and may be used in combination with the main character and others in FIG. 112(j).

112(j) to (l) and FIGS. 112(m) to (n) have a configuration in which the central portion is common, but for a privilege image having a common portion with other privilege images in this way, the common portion may be visible from the beginning. Further, it may be configured such that whether or not the common portion is shown from the beginning is determined by lottery.

In addition, the image of the treasure box in FIG. 112(o) suggests that the special zone right lottery (step S1411 in FIG. 81(a)) has been won. In this case, information about the game can be obtained from the privilege image. Also, the robot character image in FIG. 112(p) is a privilege image from which customization data can be obtained.

When a plurality of privilege images are used as shown in FIGS. 112(j) to (p), they may be arranged within a preset area such as the cross-hatched frame shown in FIG. 112(q). In addition, a plurality of positions that can be arranged for such an area may be provided, and these positions may be appropriately selected and used, but it is preferable that the position and the privilege to be obtained are not related so that the privilege to be obtained is not predicted. Also, in the examples of FIGS. 112(j) to (p), there is a character background, but this background may be configured so that nothing is displayed.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of operation of a conditional additional lottery when the privilege images of FIGS. 112(j) to 112(p) are used.

FIG. 113(a) shows an example of actions corresponding to the second to fourth games in FIG. In this example, the first clear condition corresponds to the left part, the second clear condition corresponds to the middle part, and the third clear condition corresponds to the right part. In the example of FIG. 110, the third clear condition, the second clear condition, and the first clear condition are satisfied in this order, so the operation in this case is to display the parts of the privilege image in the order of right, center, left, as shown in FIG. 113(a).

FIG. 113(b) shows an example in which the clear condition that has already been met is met again. In this example, internal winning of the condition device number 9 (middle 1st bell) is the clear condition corresponding to the middle part of the privilege image. In a state where the middle part of the privilege image is not displayed, the middle part is displayed by the internal winning of the middle 1st bell. Subsequently, although the middle 1st bell was internally elected, since the middle part has already been displayed, there is no new part to be displayed. Further, in this figure, it is shown that the left part that was not displayed is displayed by internal winning of the condition device number 8 (left 1st bell), which is the clear condition corresponding to the left part.

FIG. 113(c) shows an example in which the same conditional device (cherry here) is associated with each portion. In this example, the privilege images are displayed in order from the left by internally winning cherry three times. The part corresponding to the internal winning of the first to third cherries (clearing condition) may be determined when the clearing condition is set, or may be determined randomly or by lottery each time the clearing condition is satisfied. In any configuration, it is sufficient that the clear condition and the privilege image portion are associated with each other.

FIG. 113(d) is an example of a case where a configuration in which the privilege changes in the middle is adopted. In this example, after the middle 1st bell internal winning set as a clear condition corresponding to the middle part is established and the middle part is displayed, the strong cherry is internally won and the number of additional games is increased (the privilege is changed), and the privilege image to be used is changed accordingly. It should be noted that the change of the privilege image is not limited to the aspect of replacing the character as in this example, and may be the aspect of adding an image such as the star mark described in FIGS. 112(k) and (l).

FIG. 113(e) is an example of using clear conditions corresponding to the order of operations. In this example, when the common bell is internally won, the right part of the privilege image is displayed by forward pressing, and when the common bell is internally won, the left part of the privilege image is displayed by reverse pressing. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the portion to be displayed by an operation. Therefore, by using privilege images in which information obtained in different parts is displayed, it is possible for the player to select and display the information that the player wants to obtain. The privilege image in FIG. 113(e) has the content of "G Addition" on the right to make the player recognize that the number of games to be added can be obtained, and "50" on the left to make the user recognize the number related to the privilege. In this example, the information about the number of games to be added is obtained first, but it is also possible to display the numbers related to the benefits first. In addition to "G Addition" that shows information that can be added to the number of games that can be acquired as such a privilege image, "additional set" as a privilege when using the number of AT sets, "additional navigation" as a privilege when managing the AT state period by the number of navigations instead of the number of games, "acquisition" as a privilege when managing the AT state period by the number of times of navigation instead of the number of games, "acquire points" as a privilege when using some point. I can. For example, only the numbers (only the left part in FIG. 113(e)) may be displayed, and the right part may be displayed so that the content of the privilege can be grasped. Further, it may be configured such that the part to be displayed cannot be selected according to the player's operation for these privilege images. For example, in the case of a configuration in which the AT state is managed using two parameters, the number of times of navigation and the number of obtainable cards, both of the above-mentioned "additional navigation" and "acquisition of cards" can be used. That is, the AT status management configuration is not limited, and an appropriate display can be adopted in accordance with the AT status management configuration.

As above, the privilege image has been described with an example. In addition, when a part of the privilege images is shared between different privilege images, since it is impossible to judge which privilege image is to be displayed in a state where only this part is displayed, the expectation for the privilege may be heightened. Also, in the example of FIG. 111 , the three circle TCs are grouped together, but each part of the privilege image may be arranged separately within the display area of the effect image display device 157 . Also, part of the privilege image may be displayed from the beginning. Further, in the examples of FIGS. 110 and 111, the state in which none of the clear conditions is satisfied can be grasped by the fact that the three circle TCs are white.

[About aiming performance]
[Operation example (H1): Aim effect during CZ]
In the third embodiment, if the AT lottery is won during CZ, either the BAR right or the peach 7 right is acquired (step S1305 in FIG. 80). For these rights, a conditional device is provided that shifts to AT state regardless of the stop mode when internally won, but when these conditional devices are internally won, an aiming effect that prompts a stop operation to win a specific role is executed (step S3307 in FIG. 95). A specific description will be given below.

First, the case where the BAR right has been acquired will be described. In this case, the conditional device number 2 is the conditional device for shifting to the AT state (Yes in step S1C01 of FIG. 86). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 114, the operation when the condition device number 2 is internally won while the BAR right is acquired will be described.

FIG. 114(a) shows that the effect image display device 157 is executing an aim effect suggesting a stop operation aiming at the BAR symbol in the order of right, middle, left. Here, the condition device number 2 is internally won, and if the stop operation is appropriate, the BAR symbol is stopped on the winning line and the replay combination 10 can be won. The aim production here is a production that prompts this stop operation.

According to this aiming effect, first, the right reel 112 is aimed at the BAR symbol and the stop operation is performed. In order to stop the BAR pattern on the prize winning line, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing within the range of 4 patterns (within the pull-in range) from the position of the BAR pattern on the prize winning line as a reference. More specifically, the stop operation is required at the timing when the range from number 1 (replay symbol) to number 5 (BAR symbol) of the right reel 112 shown in FIG. 66 is on the winning line. In FIG. 114(b), the pull-in range 1 to 4 symbols ahead on the right reel 112 is indicated by four BAR symbols. Further, FIG. 114(c) shows a state in which the BAR symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the right first stop.

Subsequently, when the stopping operation is performed aiming at the BAR pattern on the middle reel 111 and the left reel 110, it is necessary to perform the stopping operation at the timing within the range of 4 patterns (within the pull-in range) from the position where the BAR pattern is on the winning line as a reference. More specifically, the stop operation is required at the timing when the range from number 1 (watermelon symbol) to number 5 (BAR symbol) of the middle reel 111 shown in FIG. 66 is on the winning line. Also, the stop operation is required at the timing when the range from number 19 (blank 1 symbol) and number 0 (bell symbol) to number 3 (BAR symbol) of the left reel 110 shown in FIG. 66 is on the winning line. FIG. 114(d) shows the pull-in range of 1 to 4 symbols on the middle reel 111 with four BAR symbols, and FIG. 114(e) shows a state where the BAR symbols are stopped on the winning line by the middle second stop. Further, FIG. 114(f) shows the drawing range of 1 to 4 symbols on the left reel 110 with four BAR symbols, and FIG. 114(g) shows a state where the BAR symbols are stopped on the winning line due to the left third stop.

As described above, by performing the stop operation according to the aiming effect, the replay combination 10 (BAR replay) is won. At this time, as shown in FIG. 114(h), the effect image display device 157 notifies that the game will shift to the AT state. This series of actions can give the player a sense of accomplishment that the player has been able to shift to the AT state by the stop operation.

In the above example, the case of performing the stop operation in the order of right, middle, and left was explained, but when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, middle, if it is the operation timing explained for each reel, the replay combination 10 can be won. In addition, in the case of the left first stop or the middle first stop, the replay combination 2 is won, and the replay combination 10 is not won.

Even when the right first stop is made, if the operation operation at the above timing fails, the replay combination 10 is not won, and the symbols constituting other winnable combinations (here, replay combinations 1, 3 to 9) are stopped. At this time, the seven 1 pattern, the seven 2 pattern and the BAR pattern are preferentially stopped. In the third embodiment, it is also possible to purposely aim at the Seven 1 symbol and stop the game to win the replay combination 6 .

Next, the case where the right to Momo 7 has been acquired will be described. In this case, conditional device numbers 3 and 4 are conditional devices for shifting to the AT state (Yes in step S1C03 of FIG. 86). Hereinafter, the operation in the case where the condition device number 3 is internally won while the peach 7 right is acquired will be described with reference to FIG. 115 .

FIG. 115(a) shows that the effect image display device 157 is executing an aim effect suggesting a stop operation aiming at the BAR symbol in the order of right, center, left. Here, since the condition device number 3 is internally won, the BAR pattern cannot be stopped on the winning line regardless of the stop operation. However, since the player does not know that the BAR symbol cannot be stopped, the player aims at the BAR symbol on the right reel 112 and performs the stop operation as in the example of FIG.

In order to stop the BAR pattern on the prize winning line, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing within the range of 4 patterns (within the pull-in range) from the position where the BAR pattern is on the prize winning line as a reference. More specifically, the stop operation is required at the timing when the range from number 1 (replay symbol) to number 5 (BAR symbol) of the right reel 112 shown in FIG. 66 is on the winning line. Of these, the stop operation at the timing when the range from number 1 (replay pattern) to number 4 (seven 2 pattern) of the right reel 112 shown in FIG. In FIG. 115(b), the pull-in range 1 to 4 symbols ahead on the right reel 112 is indicated by four BAR symbols. However, here, the BAR symbols do not stop on the winning line, and the Seven 1 and Seven 2 symbols stop preferentially. As described above, among the timings for stopping the BAR symbols, the timing when the BAR symbols are in the drawing range of 1 to 4 symbols ahead on the right reel 112 is also the timing for stopping the Seven 2 symbols, so if the BAR symbols are aimed at, the Seven 2 symbols may be stopped as a result. FIG. 115(c) shows a state in which the Seven 2 symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the right first stop.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 115(d), in the effect image display device 157, the content of the effect is changed so as to aim at the Seven 2 symbol instead of the BAR symbol. If the aiming performance before the change is executed as it is, the player may feel a sense of incongruity that the Seven 2 pattern is stopped in spite of aiming at the BAR pattern.

Subsequently, the middle reel 111 and the left reel 110 are aimed at the Seven 2 symbol and the stop operation is performed. In this case, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at a timing within a range of 4 symbols (within a pull-in range) from the position where the Seven 2 symbol is on the winning line as a reference. More specifically, the stop operation is required at the timing when the range from number 0 (cherry symbol) to number 4 (seven 2 symbol) of the middle reel 111 shown in FIG. 66 is on the winning line. Also, the stop operation is required at the timing when the range from number 0 (bell symbol) to number 4 (seven 2 symbol) of the left reel 110 shown in FIG. 66 is on the winning line. FIG. 115(e) shows the pull-in range of the 1st to 4th symbols on the middle reel 111 with four seven-two symbols, and FIG. Further, in FIG. 115(g), the drawing range of 1 to 4 symbols ahead on the left reel 110 is shown by four seven 2 symbols, and FIG. 115(h) shows a state where the seven 2 symbols are stopped on the winning line due to the left third stop.

As described above, by carrying out the stop operation according to the aiming effect, the replay combination 16 (peach 7 replay) is won. The aiming effect in this case is an effect that prompts a stop operation for winning the replay combination 16 as a result. Further, as shown in FIG. 115(i), the effect image display device 157 notifies that the state will shift to the AT state. This series of actions can give the player a sense of achievement that the player has been able to shift to the AT state by the stop operation.

In the above example, the case where the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, left is explained, but when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, middle, if it is the operation timing explained for each reel, the replay combination 16 can be won. In addition, in the case of left first stop or center first stop, replay combination 2 is won, and replay combination 16 is not won.

Even when the right first stop is made, if the operation operation at the above timing fails, the replay combination 16 is not won, and the symbols constituting the other winnable combinations (here, replay combinations 1, 3 to 6, 11 to 13) are stopped. At this time, the seven 1 pattern, the seven 2 pattern and the BAR pattern are preferentially stopped. In the third embodiment, it is also possible to purposely aim at the Seven 1 symbol and stop the game to win the replay combination 6 .

Hereinafter, the operation when the condition device number 4 is internally won in the state that the peach 7 right is acquired will be described with reference to FIG. 116 .

FIG. 116(a) shows that the effect image display device 157 is executing an aim effect suggesting a stop operation aiming at the BAR symbol in the order of right, middle, left. Here, since the condition device number 4 is internally won, the BAR pattern can be stopped on the winning line in the right first stop.

It is assumed that the player aims at the BAR symbol on the right reel 112 and performs a stop operation according to this aiming effect. In order to stop the BAR pattern on the prize winning line, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing within the range of 4 patterns (within the pull-in range) from the position of the BAR pattern on the prize winning line as a reference. More specifically, the stop operation is required at the timing when the range from number 1 (replay symbol) to number 5 (BAR symbol) of the right reel 112 shown in FIG. 66 is on the winning line. In FIG. 116(b), the pull-in range 1 to 4 symbols ahead on the right reel 112 is indicated by four BAR symbols. Also, FIG. 116(c) shows a state in which the BAR symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the right first stop.

As for the following second stop, the stop operation is performed aiming at the BAR pattern, but since the condition device number 4 is internally won here, the BAR pattern cannot be stopped on the winning line regardless of the stop operation on the middle reel 111.例文帳に追加However, since the player does not know that the BAR symbol cannot be stopped, he or she will aim at the BAR symbol on the middle reel 111 and perform the stop operation as in the example of FIG.

In order to stop the BAR pattern on the prize winning line, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing within the range of 4 patterns (within the pull-in range) from the position of the BAR pattern on the prize winning line as a reference. More specifically, the stop operation is required at the timing when the range from number 1 (watermelon symbol) to number 5 (BAR symbol) of the middle reel 111 shown in FIG. 66 is on the winning line. Among them, the timing when the range from number 1 (watermelon pattern) to number 4 (Seven 2 pattern) of the middle reel 111 shown in FIG. In FIG. 116(d), the pull-in range of 1 to 4 symbols on the middle reel 111 is indicated by 4 BAR symbols. However, here, the BAR symbols do not stop on the winning line, and the Seven 1 and Seven 2 symbols stop preferentially. As described above, among the timings for stopping the BAR symbols, the timing at which the BAR symbols are in the drawing range of 1 to 4 symbols ahead on the middle reel 111 is also the timing for stopping the Seven 2 symbols. FIG. 116(e) shows a state in which the Seven 2 symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the middle second stop.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 116(f), in the effect image display device 157, the content of the effect is changed so as to aim at the Seven 2 symbol instead of the BAR symbol. If the aiming effect before the change is executed as it is, the player may feel a sense of incongruity that the Seven 2 symbol has stopped even though he aimed at the BAR symbol. In particular, unlike the example of FIG. 115, the stop mode of the right first stop is the same as the example of FIG. 62, so there is a possibility that the player will feel a greater sense of incompatibility.

Subsequently, the left reel 110 is aimed at the Seven 2 symbol and the stop operation is performed. In this case, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at a timing within a range of 4 symbols (within a pull-in range) from the position where the Seven 2 symbol is on the winning line as a reference. More specifically, the stop operation is required at the timing when the range from number 0 (bell symbol) to number 4 (seven 2 symbol) of the left reel 110 shown in FIG. 66 is on the winning line. Of these timings, the timing when the range from number 0 (bell symbol) to number 3 (BAR symbol) of the left reel 110 shown in FIG. In FIG. 116(g), the pull-in range of 1-4 symbols ahead on the left reel 110 is indicated by 4 seven-2 symbols. Here, however, the Seven 2 pattern does not stop on the prize winning line (the Seven 2 pattern does not stop on the left reel 110 for any of the replaying hands 14 and 15 remaining as the winning prize winning role candidates), and the Seven 1 pattern and the BAR pattern stop preferentially. As explained above, among the timings for stopping the Seven 2 symbols, the timing when the Seven 2 symbols are in the pull-in range of 1 to 4 symbols ahead on the left reel 110 is also the timing for stopping the BAR symbols. FIG. 116(h) shows a state where the BAR symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the left third stop. In this case, the seven 2 symbols are aligned downward to the right.

As described above, by performing the stop operation according to the aiming effect, it becomes a state of winning the replay combination 15 (peach 7 replay). The aiming effect in this case is an effect that prompts a stop operation for winning the replay combination 15 as a result. Further, as shown in FIG. 116(i), the effect image display device 157 notifies that the state will shift to the AT state. This series of actions can give the player a sense of achievement that the player has been able to shift to the AT state by the stop operation.

In the above example, the case of performing the stop operation in the order of right, middle, and left was explained, but when the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, middle, if it is the operation timing explained for each reel, the replay combination 15 can be won. However, when the second stop operation is for the left reel 110, when the BAR pattern stops on the winning line, both replaying hands 10 and 15 are tense (at this point, it is possible to narrow down to either condition device number 2 or 4). In this case, the center reel 111 may be made to aim at the BAR pattern without changing the pattern of the aiming effect, and the Seven 2 pattern may be stopped, or the target pattern may be changed to the Seven 2 pattern. In addition, in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, replay combination 2 is won, and replay combination 15 is not won.

Even when the right first stop is made, if the operation operation at the above timing fails, the replay combination 15 is not won, and the symbols constituting other winnable combinations (here, replay combinations 1, 3 to 7, 9, 14) are stopped. At this time, the seven 1 pattern, the seven 2 pattern and the BAR pattern are preferentially stopped. In the third embodiment, it is also possible to purposely aim at the Seven 1 symbol and stop the game to win the replay combination 6 .

In the description of FIGS. 114 to 116, the aiming effect in the case of winning the AT lottery (when the BAR right or the peach 7 right is acquired) has been described, but the aiming effect may be executed even when the AT lottery has not been won (step S3317 in FIG. 95). Hereinafter, an example of the operation when the condition device number 1 is internally won while the AT lottery is not won will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 117(a) shows that the effect image display device 157 is executing an aim effect suggesting a stop operation aiming at the BAR symbol in the order of right, center, left. Here, the condition device number 1 is internally won, and the BAR pattern can be stopped on the winning line for the right first stop and middle second stop.

It is assumed that the player aims at the BAR symbol on the right reel 112 and performs a stop operation according to this aiming effect. In order to stop the BAR pattern on the prize winning line, it is necessary to perform the stop operation at the timing within the range of 4 patterns (within the pull-in range) from the position of the BAR pattern on the prize winning line as a reference. In FIG. 117(b), the pull-in range 1 to 4 symbols ahead on the right reel 112 is indicated by four BAR symbols. Further, FIG. 117(c) shows a state in which the BAR symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the right first stop.

Subsequently, when the stopping operation is performed aiming at the BAR pattern on the middle reel 111, it is necessary to perform the stopping operation at the timing within the range of 4 patterns (within the pull-in range) from the position where the BAR pattern is on the winning line as a reference. FIG. 117(d) shows the drawing range of 1 to 4 symbols ahead of the middle reel 111 with four BAR symbols, and FIG. 117(e) shows a state where the BAR symbols are stopped on the winning line by the middle second stop.

Subsequently, the player aims at the BAR symbol on the left reel 110 and performs a stop operation. In this case, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at a timing within a range of 4 symbols (within a pull-in range) from the position where the BAR symbol is on the winning line as a reference. In FIG. 117(f), the pull-in range of 1-4 symbols on the left reel 110 is shown with 4 seven-2 symbols. However, only the replay combination 8 remains as a winning combination candidate here, and only the replay symbol is stopped on the left reel 110 . FIG. 117(g) shows a state in which the replay symbol is stopped on the winning line due to the left third stop.

It should be noted that, if the operation operation is performed at a time other than the timing described above, the symbols constituting other winning combinations are stopped. At this time, Seven 1 symbol, Seven 2 symbol and BAR symbol are preferentially stopped. For this reason, it is not possible to win the replay combination 6 even if the seven 1 symbol is aimed.

When conditional device number 1 is internally won, none of the replay hands 10, 15 and 16 that win at the time of AT winning are won even if the stop operation is performed according to the aiming effect. At this time, as shown in FIG. 117(h), the effect image display device 157 displays a message "Unfortunately" notifying that the AT state will not be entered.

[Operation Example (H2): Other Configurations for Aim Effect During CZ]
As described in the examples of FIGS. 114 to 117, in the third embodiment, it is possible to lead to winning of a specific combination while changing the target symbol in the middle, thereby improving the interest of the game. In the third embodiment, the case of winning the replay combination 16 and the replay combination 15 in FIGS. 115 and 116 is more advantageous than the case of winning the replay combination 10 in FIG. Although it is not necessary to employ such a configuration in which there is a difference in the degree of advantage, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by adopting a configuration in which it is advantageous when there is a change in the target symbol. In addition, it may be configured such that it is disadvantageous when there is a change in the design to be aimed at.

In the examples of FIGS. 115 and 116, the BAR pattern is aimed at, and the performance is changed at the timing when the Seven 2 pattern which is really desired to be stopped stops. In particular, in the third embodiment, regardless of the stop mode, when the conditional device corresponding to the acquired right is internally won, the next game is shifted to the AT state. Therefore, if the Seven 2 pattern does not stop, the target performance may be continued without change, and then the performance suggesting the shift to the AT state may be executed. In addition, without being limited to this configuration, a failure effect indicating that the target symbol did not stop may be performed. In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 115 and 116, the target symbol is changed, but there may be a case where the effect of aiming at the seven-2 symbol is executed from the beginning and the target symbol is not changed.

In addition, the timing of the change in the target effect may be the moment when it is confirmed that the pattern different from the pattern indicated by the target effect (Seven 2 symbol in FIGS. 115 and 116) is stopped at the target position (the middle row in FIGS. 115 and 116) by the stop operation, or after the relevant reel is stopped. In particular, depending on the pattern arrangement of the reels and the timing of the eye pressing, there are cases where a structure that makes it easier to grasp the stop pattern is adopted, and for such a structure, it is preferable to change the effect to be aimed after the reels are stopped. In addition, since there is a possibility that some players perform the game operation by inertia and do not notice that the target pattern has been changed, it may be configured to execute freezing together with the change of the target pattern so that it is easy to notice that the target pattern has been changed.

As described in FIGS. 114 and 117, conditional device number 2 allows winning of replay role 10 when internally won, while conditional device number 1 does not win replay role 10 when internally won, but wins a winning combination in a stop mode (replay role 8 in FIG. 117) that expects winning of replaying role 10 halfway through. On the other hand, condition device numbers 3 and 4 described in FIGS. 115 and 116 allow winning of replay hands 15 and 16, respectively, but there is no condition device for expecting winning for these hands. In other words, it can be grasped that AT winning (acquisition of the right of peach 7) has been confirmed at the time when there is a change in the target symbol in the aiming effect. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and the replay combinations 15 and 16 may also be configured to have a conditional device for expecting the winning of these combinations.

Also, in the third embodiment, the configuration in which the BAR pattern and the Seven 2 pattern are adjacent to each other is adopted, but even if they are not adjacent, it is sufficient if the timing at which the Seven 2 pattern can also be stopped is included among the stop timings aimed at the BAR pattern. For example, in FIG. 66, in the configuration in which the Seven 2 pattern is arranged above the BAR pattern, the Seven 2 pattern becomes more difficult to stop when aiming at the BAR pattern as the distance increases, but when the Seven 2 pattern stops, the reel retraction amount increases, so that the player can be surprised. In addition, in the third embodiment, the BAR symbol and the Seven 2 symbol are adjacent to each other on the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111, and there is a stop timing at which both symbols can be stopped. However, regarding the operation of FIG. 115, the BAR symbol and the Seven 2 symbol may not be adjacent to each other on these reels. Also in this configuration, the operation described with reference to FIG. 115 is established. In this way, at least one reel (for example, the right reel 112 in FIG. 115) capable of stopping both the BAR pattern and the seven 2 pattern should be provided, and the aiming effect may be changed at the timing when the reel is stopped. 116, the right reel 112 may have a configuration in which the BAR symbol and the seven 2 symbol are not adjacent to each other.

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 114 to 117, the configuration using the BAR pattern and the Seven 2 pattern has been described, but the pattern to be used is not limited to this. Moreover, the winning combination is not limited to the replay combination, and various combinations can be used. Furthermore, in this example, the target performance action is configured to be performed when notifying the transition to the AT state, but the application scene of this action is not limited to this example. For example, in the third embodiment, the number of AT remaining games is added when conditional device numbers 2 to 4 are internally won in the special zone, but it may be configured to execute the intended effect when the conditional device is internally won.

Here, an example in which the composition of the target effect is combined with a bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 118 . In this example, a configuration is adopted in which the big bonus is won with "7-7-7" and the regular bonus is won with "7-7-BAR". In this configuration, when the bonus is confirmed, as shown in FIG. 118(a), a display that can be either a big bonus or a regular bonus is performed until all reels are stopped. Here, when 7 symbols are stopped on the upper stage of the left reel, the big bonus is determined (first check). For this reason, as shown in FIG. 118(b), the BAR pattern displayed on the screen is erased at the stage of the first confirmation, and the confirmation of the big bonus is announced. Also, for example, when the big bonus is established, if the stop operation is performed when the 7 symbols are positioned in the upper left row, the 7 symbols will stop in the upper left row and the big bonus will be confirmed, while if there are 7 symbols outside the display frame, the 7 symbols will be drawn to the left middle row and the big bonus will not be confirmed. may be changed as in the third embodiment.

[Operation example (H3): Aim effect when moving to specialized zone]
In the third embodiment, if the special zone right lottery (step S1411 in FIG. 81(a)) is won in the AT state, the blue 7 right is acquired. If one of the condition device numbers 2, 3, and 4 is internally won while the blue 7 right is acquired, the game moves to the specialized zone (step S1D11 in FIG. 87(a)). On the other hand, if one of the conditional device numbers 2, 3, and 4 is internally won while the right to Blue 7 is won, an aiming effect is executed to prompt a stop operation for winning the replay combination 6 (step S3409 in FIG. 96(a)). A specific description will be given below with reference to FIG.

Here, a case will be described in which the condition device number 2 is internally won while the blue 7 right is acquired. In this case, as shown in FIG. 119(a), the effect image display device 157 executes an aiming effect suggesting that the stop operation be performed aiming at the Seven 1 symbol in the order of right, center, left. Here, the condition device number 2 is internally won, and if the stop operation is appropriate, the Seven 1 symbol can be stopped on the winning line and the replay combination 6 can be won. The aim production here is a production that prompts this stop operation. FIG. 119(b) shows that the replay combination 6 was won as a result of performing the stop operation according to this aiming effect. Also, at this time, it is shown that a special zone entry effect suggesting a transition to a special zone is being executed (step S3411 in FIG. 96(a)).

As explained in the example of FIG. 114, when the condition device number 2 is internally won, the replay combination 2 is won in the case of the left first stop or the middle first stop, and the replay combination 1, 3 to 10 is won in the case of the right first stop. Incidentally, there are Seven 1 symbol, Seven 2 symbol, and BAR symbol as candidates of symbols constituting winning combinations, and if it is possible to stop these symbols, these symbols are preferentially stopped. With this configuration, it is possible not only to win the re-game role 6 according to the aiming effect as shown in the route of FIG. 119(b), but also to win the re-game role 10 as shown in the route of FIG. In addition, the route in FIG. 119(d) indicates that the replay combination 1 was won. In either case, after all the reels have stopped, a special zone entry effect suggesting a shift to the special zone is executed (step S3411 in FIG. 96(a)).

In addition, although FIG. 119 explained the case where the condition device number 2 is internally won, the same aiming effect is executed when the condition device numbers 3 and 4 are internally won. When conditional device number 3 is internally won, replay combination 2 is won in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, and replay combination 1, 3 to 6, 11 to 13, or 16 is won in the case of right first stop. In addition, when the condition device number 3 is internally won, a replay combination 2 is won in the case of the left first stop or the middle first stop, and any of the replay combinations 1, 3 to 7, 9, 14 and 15 is won in the case of the right first stop. Therefore, when conditional device numbers 3 and 4 are internally won, a replay combination 6 can be won by performing a stop operation according to the aiming effect in the same way as when conditional device number 2 is internally won. In addition, even if the aiming effect is not followed, the transition to the special zone is performed regardless of the winning combination, and the special zone entry effect is executed. Therefore, for example, when the condition device number 3 is internally won, it is possible to win the replay combination 16 by aiming at the Seven 2 symbol without following the aiming effect.

[Operation example (H4): Aim effect in specialized zone]
In the third embodiment, when the condition device numbers 2, 3, and 4 are internally won in the specialized zone, the number of remaining AT games is added (step S1423 in FIG. 81(b), FIG. 82(d)). On the other hand, when one of the conditional device numbers 1 to 4 is internally won in the special zone, an aiming effect is executed to prompt a stop operation for winning a specific role (step S3425 in FIG. 96(b)). A specific description will be given below.

First, the case where the condition device number 2 is internally won will be described with reference to FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 120(a), the effect image display device 157 executes an aiming effect suggesting that the player should perform a stop operation aiming at the BAR symbol in the order of right, middle, left. Here, the condition device number 2 is internally won, and if the stop operation is appropriate, the BAR symbol is stopped on the winning line and the replay combination 10 can be won. The aiming effect here is a effect that encourages this stop operation. In the route of FIG. 120(b), it is shown that the replay combination 10 was won as a result of the stop operation according to this aiming effect. Here, the number of remaining AT games is increased by 10 games due to the internal winning of the condition device number 2 (FIG. 82(d)), but in the route of FIG.

As explained in the example of FIG. 114, when conditional device number 2 is internally won, replay combination 2 is won in the case of left first stop or middle first stop, and replay combination 1, 3 to 10 is won in the case of right first stop. Incidentally, symbol candidates constituting winning combinations include Seven 1 symbol, Seven 2 symbol, and BAR symbol, and if it is possible to stop these symbols, these symbols are preferentially stopped. With this configuration, it is possible not only to win the re-game role 10 according to the aiming effect as shown in the route of FIG. 120(b), but also to win the re-game role 6 as shown in the route of FIG. In addition, the route in FIG. 120(c) indicates that the replay combination 1 has been won. In addition, in the third embodiment, the success effect is executed not only when winning the replay combination 10 but also when winning the replay combination 6 (step S3A17 in FIG. 97). In the route of FIG. 120(d), it is shown that the winning of the replay combination 6 and the success effect indicating the additional value are executed (step S3A17 in FIG. 97). Further, in the route of FIG. 120(c), it is shown that the failure effect is executed when the replay combination 1 is won (step S3A19 of FIG. 97).

Next, the case where the condition device number 3 is internally won will be described with reference to FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 121(a), the effect image display device 157 executes an aiming effect suggesting that the player should perform a stop operation aiming at the Seven 2 symbol in the order of right, center, left. Here, the condition device number 3 is internally won, and if the stop operation is appropriate, it is possible to stop the Seven 2 symbol on the winning line and win the replay combination 16. The aim production here is a production that prompts this stop operation. In the route of FIG. 121(b), it is shown that the replay combination 16 was won as a result of the stop operation according to this aiming effect. Here, the number of remaining AT games is increased by 30 games due to the internal winning of the conditional device number 3 (FIG. 82(d)), but in the route of FIG.

As explained in the example of FIG. 115, when the condition device number 3 is internally won, the replay combination 2 is won in the case of the left first stop or the middle first stop, and the replay combination 1, 3 to 6, 11 to 13, or 16 is won in the case of the right first stop. Incidentally, symbol candidates constituting winning combinations include Seven 1 symbol, Seven 2 symbol, and BAR symbol, and if it is possible to stop these symbols, these symbols are preferentially stopped. With this configuration, it is possible not only to win the re-game combination 16 according to the aiming performance as shown in the route of FIG. 121(b), but also to win the re-game combination 6 as shown in the route of FIG. In addition, the route of FIG. 121(c) indicates that the replay combination 1 was won. In addition, in the third embodiment, the success effect is executed not only when winning the replay combination 16 but also when winning the replay combination 6 (step S3A17 in FIG. 97). However, in the case of the winning of the replay combination 6, a value (here, 10) smaller than 30, which is the number of additional games, is displayed. In the route of FIG. 121(d), it is shown that the winning effect of the replay combination 6 and the addition of 10 games are executed (step S3A17 of FIG. 97). Further, in the route of FIG. 121(c), it is shown that the failure effect is executed when the replay combination 1 is won (step S3A19 of FIG. 97).

In addition, even if the condition device number 1 is internally won, the aiming effect (similar to FIG. 120) is executed, but neither the replay combination 6 nor the replay combination 10 is won, and the AT remaining game number is not added, so the failure effect is executed regardless of the stop mode (step S3A19 in FIG. 97).

In addition, although the aiming effect when the conditional device number 4 is internally won is not illustrated, the effect similar to that in FIG. 121 may be used, the effect in FIG. When the conditional device number 4 is internally won, if the replay combination 15 is won, a success effect indicating the number of additional games is executed (step S3A17 in FIG. 97), if the replay combination 6 is won, a success effect that displays a value smaller than the additional game number of 30 (here, 10) is executed (step S3A17 in FIG. 97), and if a combination other than these is won, a failure effect is executed (step S3A19 in FIG. 97).

In the above operation, even if there is an additional charge, it will not be notified, but this non-notified portion will be displayed when returning to the AT state. It is not limited to the timing of returning to the AT state, but may be the final game in the AT state (apparently), the final game in the specialized zone, or the timing of winning a new additional lottery.

[Operation Example (H5): Other Configurations for Aiming Effect in Specialized Zone]
As described in the examples of FIGS. 120 and 121, in the third embodiment, when a pattern (role) different from the intended pattern (role) is won, depending on the winning role, by providing a case in which the effect of granting a privilege is executed in the same manner as when the original aimed pattern (role) is stopped, a new game property can be obtained such as intentionally stopping the pattern different from the aimed pattern. In the third embodiment, the number of additional games is notified when the player wins the replay role 10 and when the replay role 6 is won. However, the effect when the target pattern (role) and a different pattern (role) are won is not limited to the effect of notifying the number of the additional games, and may be the effect of other benefits. Such benefits are not limited to benefits that are advantageous to the player (such as transitioning to an advantageous state, lengthening the period of an already set advantageous state, etc.), but may also be information related to the gaming machine such as the setting values of the gaming machine or the internal game state. Furthermore, in the case where the gaming machine provides an individual environment for the user, for example, image data and music data for customization, information unrelated to the game, such as information such as images and music that can be downloaded to the portable terminal etc. owned by the player. may be a privilege. Furthermore, it may be a combination of these.

In the third embodiment, the space between the BAR pattern and the Seven 1 pattern is arranged beyond the maximum pull-in range, but not limited to this structure, for example, these patterns may be arranged adjacent to each other. However, if the interval between the BAR pattern and the Seven 1 pattern is within the maximum pull-in range, the other one may stop even though one is aimed, making it difficult to aim clearly. Therefore, when adopting a structure that stops a pattern (role) different from the pattern (role) aimed at by the stop timing, it is preferable to configure as in the third embodiment.

In addition, in the third embodiment, different configurations are adopted for winning the replay combination 1, replay combination 6, and replay combination 10 depending on the operation timing, but the operation conditions for differentiating symbols and roles to be stopped are not limited. In addition, when it differs using the operation order, another role will be aimed at by the operation order different from the suggested operation order.

In the example of FIG. 120, the same number of additional games is reported for both the case of winning the replay role 10 and the case of winning the replay role 6, but in the example of FIG. In this way, the performance when winning a pattern (role) different from the intended pattern (role) may be the same as or different from that of winning the intended pattern (role). For example, when a pattern (role) different from the target pattern (role) stops, a different display than when the target symbol (role) stops may be performed (or added) to suggest information about the game such as set values and internal states. FIG. 122 shows, as a modified example of the route in FIG. 120(d), an example in which an image suggesting a set value is displayed in addition to the notification of the number of additional games. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific image is displayed only when a symbol (role) different from the symbol (role) aimed at is stopped. With these configurations, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of not aiming at the symbols.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119, for the replay combination 6, an opportunity is separately provided to perform an effect aimed at this. This configuration may give the impression that the replay combination 6 is a special combination. In particular, in the third embodiment, the frequency of the aiming effect in FIG. 119 is lower than the frequency in FIGS. 120 and 121 (the winning probability in FIG. 82(c) is lower than the winning probability of the conditional device number in FIG. 82(d)), so such an impression can be given more strongly. By giving this impression, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of intentionally aiming for a symbol different from the symbol suggested in the case of FIG. 120 or 121 .

<others>
In the third embodiment, the configuration in which the internal winning probability of the replay combination does not change is used, but the configurations described with reference to FIGS. Also, in the third embodiment, a configuration in which no bonus combination is provided is used, but the configurations described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 122 and their modifications can also be applied to configurations in which a bonus combination is provided. In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 114 to 122, the configuration using the condition device that wins the replay combination of the condition device numbers 1 to 4 has been described, but the combination to be used, the condition device, the symbol combination, etc. are not limited to this configuration.

In the third embodiment, the two limits of state B are that the state B continues for 1500 games and that the net increase in the number of games exceeds 2400 from the minimum value.

Also, state B is an example of a game state in which an end condition (limit) that is advantageous to the player and different from the main end condition is provided, but is not limited to the configuration of the third embodiment.

For example, if the AT (or AR) is terminated when the number of remaining AT games satisfies the termination condition, and the configuration is terminated (forced termination) even if the AT (or AR) does not satisfy the above termination condition, automatic settlement or stoppage may be executed when the condition for forced termination is satisfied. Further, for example, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the bonus ends when the number of remaining games satisfies the termination condition, and a configuration in which the bonus is terminated (forcibly terminated) even though the bonus does not satisfy the termination condition, automatic settlement or termination may be executed when the condition for forced termination is satisfied. In this way, when a second game state (for example, state B, AT, bonus) more advantageous than the first game state (for example, state A, non-AT, non-bonus) is provided, automatic settlement or stopping may be executed according to the end condition of this second game state. In this configuration, the end condition can be grasped by executing automatic settlement or cancellation.

In the third embodiment, the CZ, AT state, and specialized zone are adopted as states in which operation navigation is executed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and so-called AR or the like may be used. In addition, although the AT state period is managed by the number of remaining AT games, for example, it may be managed by the number of remaining navigation times or the number of remaining obtainable numbers, or a configuration in which whether to continue or not is decided by lottery.

The third embodiment employs a configuration in which flags and variables related to this state are initialized when state B ends (step S1E21 in FIG. 88). Such information is not limited to the variables used in the third embodiment, and various variables and flags may be used to determine whether or not to execute automatic settlement and cancellation. For example, as conditions for activating the automatic settlement function, the number of continuous games in the AT state is 200 or more, the number of operations navigation in the AT state is 50 or more, or the difference in the number of sheets acquired from the start to the end of the AT state is above a certain level. Further, the timing for judging these conditions is not limited to the configuration in which judgment is made at the end of the advantageous interval as in state B, but a configuration may be employed in which the corresponding flag is set to ON when the above conditions are met, and automatic settlement and stop are executed according to this flag at the end of the advantageous interval. Note that if the variables and flags described here are employed, these variables and flags are initialized when state B ends.

Further, when the automatic settlement is executed, a signal may be output through the information output circuit 334 . This signal may be configured so that it can be output only when the automatic settlement function or the stop function is activated. With this configuration, the player may be able to grasp that the automatic settlement function and the stopping function are enabled. In addition, regardless of whether it is valid or invalid, the signal may be output when the execution condition (=reaching the limiter) of the automatic settlement function or the stop function is satisfied. In this configuration, the player may be able to keep track of the number of times the limiter has been reached.

Further, with respect to the automatic settlement function, in addition to paying out the stored game media (tokens), information provided for the stored game may be stored in an external recording medium (transfer of the stored game media record).

It should be noted that the state of the switch when the power is turned on is used to enable or disable the automatic settlement and stop functions. For this reason, for example, when the power is turned off immediately before reaching the limiter and reset to either valid or invalid, and then the power is turned on again and the limiter is reached, automatic settlement or termination is executed according to the reset state.

In the above embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a slot machine using game balls (for example, pachinko balls) as a game medium, a pachinko machine, an arrange ball game machine, a rock-and-roll game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, such as operating on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game machine) or a personal computer, by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals. This includes outputting digitized data to a storage device).

Although each embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to each embodiment within the scope of the invention, and configurations in other embodiments can be combined, and those involving such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention.

<Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment>
Configurations of the invention described in the above description will now be described with reference to corresponding configurations.

<<Configuration of the invention described in the first and second embodiments>>
Some game machines are provided with states having different degrees of advantage, but if a plurality of termination conditions are provided for ending the state advantageous to the player, the player cannot grasp the cause of the termination of the advantageous state, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game is reduced. The following describes the configuration of the gaming machine that makes it easy for the player to grasp the end condition of the state that is advantageous to the player.

In the above description,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery;
payout control means (for example, main control section 300) for controlling payout of game media according to the symbol combination of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means;
Production means for executing production (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game control means (for example, a main control unit 300) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of types of game states including a first game state (for example, state A) and a second game state (for example, state B) more advantageous than the first game state;
A gaming machine (for example, a second embodiment) comprising
The game control means is
If a continuation condition (for example, neither the number of AR remaining games nor the number of AR rights is 0) is satisfied in the second game state, the second game state is continued, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the second game state is terminated,
Means for terminating the second game state when a predetermined end condition (for example, the number of games that can be continued in state B is 0 or the MY counter is 2400) is satisfied even when the condition for allowing continuation is satisfied in the second game state,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of ending effects (for example, END3 effect, END4 effect),
The plurality of types of ending effects include a first ending effect (for example, END4 effect) and a second ending effect (for example, END3 effect) different from the first ending effect,
The directing means is
In the second game state, the first ending effect is executed based on the fact that the first ending effect start condition (for example, the MY counter is 2150 or more) is satisfied,
In the second game state, the second ending effect is executed based on the fact that a second ending effect start condition different from the first ending effect start condition (for example, the MY counter is greater than 2350, or the number of games that can be continued in state B is 10) is satisfied,
means for terminating the first ending effect being executed and executing the second ending effect (for example, FIGS. 59 and 60),
The first ending effect is a effect that continues until the second ending effect start condition is satisfied (for example, FIG. 59, FIG. 60),
The second ending effect is a effect that continues until the predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, FIG. 59, FIG. 60),
(Refer to the description of [Regarding forced termination conditions and ending effect (END3 effect and END4 effect) of state B]) characterized by this.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means is a means that does not execute the first ending effect when the first ending effect start condition is satisfied during execution of the second ending effect (for example, determination of Yes in step S3401 in FIG. 58, step S3407 is not executed),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
As the predetermined end conditions, there are a first end condition (for example, the MY counter is 2400) and a second end condition (for example, the number of games that can be continued in state B is 0),
The first end condition is a condition regarding the number of game media acquired in the second game state,
The second end condition is a condition regarding the number of games in the second game state,
The game control means is means for terminating the second game state when either one of the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied in the second game state,
As the second ending effect start conditions, there are a second ending effect start condition A (for example, the MY counter is greater than 2350) and a second ending effect start condition B (for example, the number of games that can be continued in state B is 10),
The second ending effect start condition A is a condition related to the number of game media acquired in the second game state, and is a condition that is satisfied earlier than the first end condition in the second game state,
The second ending effect start condition B is a condition related to the number of games played in the second game state, and is a condition that is satisfied earlier than the second end condition in the second game state,
The effect means ends the first ending effect and executes the second ending effect if either one of the second ending effect start condition A and the second ending effect start condition B is satisfied during the execution of the first ending effect (for example, FIGS. 59 and 60).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second ending effect start condition B is a condition that may be satisfied before the first ending effect start condition (for example, FIG. 61),
The effect means is means for executing the second ending effect when the second ending effect start condition B is satisfied even when the first ending effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 61).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first ending effect start condition is a condition related to the number of game media used during at least a part of the period of the second game state and the difference in the number of game media based on the number of payouts of the game media.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first ending effect start condition is a condition related to the number of rights corresponding to the right in the second game state, and is a condition that is satisfied when the number of rights exceeds a predetermined number (see a modification example in which the END4 effect start condition is a condition related to the number of rights related to state B in the description of [conditions for forced termination of state B and ending effects (END3 effect and END4 effect)]);
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation is performed based on the lottery result of the internal lottery;
payout control means (for example, main control section 300) for controlling payout of game media according to the symbol combination of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means;
Production means for executing production (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
A game control means (for example, a main control unit 300) capable of setting one game state from a plurality of types of game states including a first game state (for example, state A) and a second game state (for example, state B) more advantageous than the first game state;
A gaming machine (e.g., second embodiment) comprising
The game control means is
terminating the second game state based on satisfaction of a first termination condition (for example, the MY counter is 2400) relating to the number of game media acquired in the second game state;
Means for ending the second game state based on satisfaction of a second end condition (for example, the number of games that can be continued in state B is 0) regarding the number of games played in the second game state,
The directing means is
It is possible to execute an ending effect (for example, END3 effect) that suggests that the second game state continues until either one of the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied,
means for executing the ending effect based on satisfaction of conditions for starting the ending effect (for example, the MY counter is greater than 2350, or the number of games that can be continued in state B is 10) in the second game state;
End condition estimation means (for example, main control unit 300, step S3419 in FIG. 58) for estimating which of the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied first in the second game state currently set when the ending effect start condition is satisfied,
The directing means is
When the end condition estimation means estimates that the first end condition is satisfied before the second end condition, a predetermined display (for example, a fraction format display in which the denominator is "2400" and the numerator is the value of the MY counter, FIG. 59) is performed in the ending effect,
Means that does not perform the predetermined display in the ending effect when the end condition estimation means estimates that the second end condition is satisfied before the first end condition (for example, FIG. 60, FIG. 61),
A game machine (see the description of [About the content of the ending effect (END3 effect and END4 effect)]) is described.

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The first termination condition is a condition relating to the number of game media used during at least a part of the period of the second game state and the number of game media paid out (for example, the MY counter is the cumulative total of the number of game media in state B, and is reset and recounted from the next game when it becomes negative), and is satisfied when the difference number exceeds a predetermined number.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The directing means is
During execution of the ending effect, it is possible to perform a display corresponding to the current value of the difference number (for example, a display corresponding to the value of the MY counter),
means for displaying, as the predetermined display, a display corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, a display corresponding to the upper limit of the MY counter "2400") together with a display corresponding to the value of the difference number;
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The directing means is
During the execution of the ending effect, it is possible to display the current value of the difference number (for example, the value of the MY counter),
means for displaying, as the predetermined display, a display indicating the value of the predetermined number (for example, the upper limit of the MY counter is "2400") together with the display of the value of the difference number;
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The ending effect start condition is a condition related to the number of rights corresponding to the rights in the second game state, and is a condition that is satisfied when the number of rights exceeds a predetermined number (see the modification in which the ending effect start condition is a condition related to the number of rights related to state B in the description of [Contents of ending effect (END 3 effect and END 4 effect)]).
A game machine characterized by:

<<Configuration of the invention described in the third embodiment>>
In the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states;
setting change means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of changing setting values with different degrees of advantage;
An amusement machine equipped with production means capable of executing multiple types of production (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
The setting change means is a means for turning on the power with a predetermined operation (for example, inserting a separately provided key and turning it to a predetermined position) so that the setting value can be changed,
The plurality of game states include a first game state (eg, state A) and a second game state (eg, state B),
The game control means is
The second game state may be set following the first game state,
After the end of the second game state, the first game state may be newly set,
When the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the first game state may be set (see <<state A and state B>>),
Means for setting any one of a plurality of types of game intervals in the second game state,
The plurality of types of game sections include a first section (eg, normal mode) and a second section (eg, high probability mode) more advantageous than the first section,
The game control means may set the second interval based on the end of the first game state and the setting of the second game state (for example, when the state B transition lottery wins, the number of pt high probability remaining games is given (step S1019 in FIG. 73) and becomes a high probability mode) means,
The directing means is
Based on the setting of the second section by the game control means, a predetermined effect (for example, display of the background in the high probability mode) may be executed,
When the second section is set in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the predetermined effect may not be executed (see operation example (F3)),
Means for not executing the predetermined effect when the second interval is set during the period from when the power is turned on without the predetermined operation until the game is played a predetermined number of times (see operation example (F4)),
The number of games played from the setting of the second game state to the setting of the first game state is greater than the number of games played from the setting of the first game state to the setting of the second game state (for example, the number of games from state A to state B is about 1.5, and transition from state B to state A does not occur unless at least CZ (20 games) is passed).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means may execute a different effect from the predetermined effect if power is cut off while the predetermined effect is being executed and then the power is turned on without the predetermined operation (for example, FIG. 107).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means performs a predetermined lottery when the second section is set in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, and performs the predetermined effect based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery (for example, a configuration that determines the setting of the first flag in the morning by lottery).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The directing means is
A first effect (for example, normal background) may be executed in the first game state,
The first effect may be executed in the first section of the second game state,
In the second section of the second game state, the first effect may be executed when the predetermined effect is not executed (for example, when the first flag in the morning is on, the normal background is displayed instead of the background in the high probability mode).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means does not execute the predetermined effect when the second section is set first in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation (operation example (F6), the conditions for canceling the first morning flag are "conditions satisfied when the first high probability mode set after the power is turned on and the transition from state A to state B ends" and "when the set value is changed, the condition is satisfied when the first high probability mode ends. "cancellation conditions"),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states;
setting change means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of changing setting values with different degrees of advantage;
An amusement machine equipped with production means capable of executing multiple types of production (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
The setting change means is a means for turning on the power with a predetermined operation (for example, inserting a separately provided key and turning it to a predetermined position) so that the setting value can be changed,
The plurality of game states include a first game state (eg, state A) and a second game state (eg, state B),
The game control means is
The second game state may be set following the first game state,
After the end of the second game state, the first game state may be newly set,
When the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the first game state may be set (see <<state A and state B>>),
Means for setting any one of a plurality of types of game intervals in the second game state,
The plurality of types of game sections include a first section (eg, normal mode) and a second section (eg, high probability mode) more advantageous than the first section,
The game control means is
The second interval may be set when a first condition (e.g., transition from state A to state B) is satisfied;
A means that may set the second interval when a second condition different from the first condition (for example, winning a pt high probability set number lottery) is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied based on the end of the first game state and the setting of the second game state,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied in the second gaming state (for example, pt high probability set number lottery is executed in state B),
The directing means is
Based on the setting of the second section by the game control means, a predetermined effect (for example, display of the background in the high probability mode) may be executed,
In the second game state that is first set after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, if the second section is set by satisfying the first condition, the predetermined effect may not be executed (see operation example (F3)),
When the second section is set by satisfying the second condition during the period from when the power is turned on without the predetermined operation until the game is played a predetermined number of times, the predetermined effect is not executed (operation example (F4), see FIG. 105).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The second condition is a condition that is not satisfied when the second interval is set (operation example (F7), stating "Do not execute pt high probability set number lottery when in high probability mode"),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means may execute a different effect from the predetermined effect if power is cut off while the predetermined effect is being executed and then the power is turned on without the predetermined operation (for example, FIG. 107).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means performs a predetermined lottery when the second section is set in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, and performs the predetermined effect based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery (for example, a configuration that determines the setting of the first flag in the morning by lottery).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The directing means is
A first effect (for example, normal background) may be executed in the first game state,
The first effect may be executed in the first section of the second game state,
In the second section of the second game state, the first effect may be executed when the predetermined effect is not executed (for example, when the first flag in the morning is on, the normal background is displayed instead of the background in the high probability mode).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means does not execute the predetermined effect when the second section is set first in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation (operation example (F6), the conditions for canceling the first morning flag are "conditions satisfied when the first high probability mode set after the power is turned on and the transition from state A to state B ends" and "when the set value is changed, the condition is satisfied when the first high probability mode ends. "cancellation conditions"),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states;
setting change means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of changing setting values with different degrees of advantage;
An amusement machine equipped with production means capable of executing multiple types of production (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
The setting change means is a means for turning on the power with a predetermined operation (for example, inserting a separately provided key and turning it to a predetermined position) so that the setting value can be changed,
The plurality of game states include a first game state (eg, state A) and a second game state (eg, state B),
The game control means is
The second game state may be set following the first game state,
After the end of the second game state, the first game state may be newly set,
When the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the first game state may be set (see <<state A and state B>>),
Means for setting any one of a plurality of types of game intervals in the second game state,
The plurality of types of game sections include a first section (eg, normal mode) and a second section (eg, high probability mode) more advantageous than the first section,
The game control means is
There is a case where the second section is set based on the fact that the first game state is finished and the second game state is set (for example, when the state B transition lottery wins, the number of pt high probability remaining games is given (step S1019 in FIG. 73), and the high probability mode is set),
Means for returning to the state in which the first game state is set when a power failure occurs in the state in which the first game state is set, and then the power is turned on without the predetermined operation (for example, FIG. 108),
The directing means is
Based on the setting of the second section by the game control means, a predetermined effect (for example, display of the background in the high probability mode) may be executed,
When the power failure occurs while the first game state is set, and then the power is turned on without the predetermined operation, and the second interval is set in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on, the predetermined effect may not be executed (for example, when the power is turned on, the first morning flag is set to on, and the background display in the high probability mode is not displayed until it is turned off).
When power is cut off while the first game state is set, the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, and the second section is set in the second game state that was set first after the power was turned on, the predetermined effect may not be executed (for example, the first morning flag is set to ON when the power is turned on, and the background display in the high probability mode is not displayed until it is turned off).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The directing means is
When the power failure occurs while the first game state is set, and then the second interval is set after the power is turned on without the predetermined operation until the game is played a predetermined number of times, the predetermined effect may not be executed (operation example (F4), FIG. 108).
Means for not executing the predetermined effect in the case where the second interval is set during the period from when the power is turned off after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation until the game is played a predetermined number of times (operation example (F3), FIG. 103).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means may execute a different effect from the predetermined effect if power is cut off while the predetermined effect is being executed and then the power is turned on without the predetermined operation (for example, FIG. 107).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means performs a predetermined lottery when the second section is set in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, and performs the predetermined effect based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery (for example, a configuration that determines the setting of the first flag in the morning by lottery).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The directing means is
A first effect (for example, normal background) may be executed in the first game state,
The first effect may be executed in the first section of the second game state,
In the second section of the second game state, the first effect may be executed when the predetermined effect is not executed (for example, when the first flag in the morning is on, the normal background is displayed instead of the background in the high probability mode).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means does not execute the predetermined effect when the second section is set first in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation (operation example (F6), the conditions for canceling the first morning flag are "conditions satisfied when the first high probability mode set after the power is turned on and the transition from state A to state B ends" and "when the set value is changed, the condition is satisfied when the first high probability mode ends. "cancellation conditions"),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states;
setting change means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of changing setting values with different degrees of advantage;
An amusement machine equipped with production means capable of executing multiple types of production (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
The setting change means is a means for turning on the power with a predetermined operation (for example, inserting a separately provided key and turning it to a predetermined position) so that the setting value can be changed,
The plurality of game states include a first game state (eg, state A) and a second game state (eg, state B),
The game control means is
The second game state may be set following the first game state,
After the end of the second game state, the first game state may be newly set,
When the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the first game state may be set (see <<state A and state B>>),
Means for setting any one of a plurality of types of game intervals in the second game state,
The plurality of types of game sections include a first section (eg, normal mode) and a second section (eg, high probability mode) more advantageous than the first section,
The game control means may set the second interval based on the end of the first game state and the setting of the second game state (for example, when the state B transition lottery wins, the number of pt high probability remaining games is given (step S1019 in FIG. 73) and becomes a high probability mode) means,
The directing means is
Based on the setting of the second section by the game control means, a predetermined effect (for example, display of the background in the high probability mode) may be executed,
In the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, if the second section is set, the immediately preceding effect may be continued without executing the predetermined effect (see operation example (F3)),
When the second section is set during the period from when the power is turned on without the predetermined operation until the game is played a predetermined number of times, the immediately preceding effect is continued without executing the predetermined effect (see operation example (F4)).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
Even if the second section is set and the predetermined effect is not executed, the effect means may execute the predetermined effect if the new second section is set after the end of the second section.
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means may execute a different effect from the predetermined effect if power is cut off while the predetermined effect is being executed and then the power is turned on without the predetermined operation (for example, FIG. 107).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means performs a predetermined lottery when the second section is set in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, and performs the predetermined effect based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery (for example, a configuration that determines the setting of the first flag in the morning by lottery).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The directing means is
A first effect (for example, normal background) may be executed in the first game state,
The first effect may be executed in the first section of the second game state,
In the second section of the second game state, the first effect may be executed when the predetermined effect is not executed (for example, when the first flag in the morning is on, the normal background is displayed instead of the background in the high probability mode).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means does not execute the predetermined effect when the second section is set first in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation (operation example (F6), the conditions for canceling the first morning flag are "conditions satisfied when the first high probability mode set after the power is turned on and the transition from state A to state B ends" and "when the set value is changed, the condition is satisfied when the first high probability mode ends. "cancellation conditions"),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states;
setting change means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of changing setting values with different degrees of advantage;
An amusement machine equipped with production means capable of executing multiple types of production (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
The setting change means is a means for turning on the power with a predetermined operation (for example, inserting a separately provided key and turning it to a predetermined position) so that the setting value can be changed,
The plurality of game states include a first game state (eg, state A) and a second game state (eg, state B),
The game control means is
The second game state may be set following the first game state,
After the end of the second game state, the first game state may be newly set,
When the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the first game state may be set (see <<state A and state B>>),
Means for setting any one of a plurality of types of game intervals in the second game state,
The plurality of types of game sections include a first section (eg, normal mode) and a second section (eg, high probability mode) more advantageous than the first section,
The game control means may set the second interval based on the end of the first game state and the setting of the second game state (for example, when the state B transition lottery wins, the number of pt high probability remaining games is given (step S1019 in FIG. 73) and becomes a high probability mode) means,
The directing means is
Based on the setting of the second section by the game control means, a predetermined effect (for example, display of the background in the high probability mode) may be executed,
When the second section is set in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the predetermined effect may not be executed (see operation example (F3)),
Means for not executing the predetermined effect when the second interval is set during the period from when the power is turned on without the predetermined operation until the game is played a predetermined number of times (see operation example (F4)),
The predetermined number of times is equal to or greater than the expected number of games played from the setting of the first gaming state to the setting of the second gaming state (for example, the expected number of games to be played from state A to state B is 1 to 2, and 30 games, which is the first flag on period in the morning, is more frequent).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means may execute a different effect from the predetermined effect if power is cut off while the predetermined effect is being executed and then the power is turned on without the predetermined operation (for example, FIG. 107).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means performs a predetermined lottery when the second section is set in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, and performs the predetermined effect based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery (for example, a configuration that determines the setting of the first flag in the morning by lottery).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The directing means is
A first effect (for example, normal background) may be executed in the first game state,
The first effect may be executed in the first section of the second game state,
In the second section of the second game state, the first effect may be executed when the predetermined effect is not executed (for example, when the first flag in the morning is on, the normal background is displayed instead of the background in the high probability mode).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means does not execute the predetermined effect when the second section is set first in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation (operation example (F6), the conditions for canceling the first morning flag are "conditions satisfied when the first high probability mode set after the power is turned on and the transition from state A to state B ends" and "when the set value is changed, the condition is satisfied when the first high probability mode ends. "cancellation conditions"),
A game machine characterized by:

Also, in the description above,
A game control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states;
setting change means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of changing setting values with different degrees of advantage;
An amusement machine equipped with production means capable of executing multiple types of production (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272 and 277, various lamps 420),
The setting change means is a means for turning on the power with a predetermined operation (for example, inserting a separately provided key and turning it to a predetermined position) so that the setting value can be changed,
The plurality of game states include a first game state (eg, state A) and a second game state (eg, state B),
The game control means is
The second game state may be set following the first game state,
After the end of the second game state, the first game state may be newly set,
When the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the first game state may be set (see <<state A and state B>>),
Means for setting any one of a plurality of types of game intervals in the second game state,
The plurality of types of game intervals include a first interval (e.g., normal mode), a second interval (e.g., high-probability mode) that is more advantageous than the first interval, and a third interval (e.g., AT state) that is more advantageous than the first interval.
The game control means is
There is a case where the second section is set based on the fact that the first game state is finished and the second game state is set (for example, when the state B transition lottery wins, the number of pt high probability remaining games is given (step S1019 in FIG. 73), and the high probability mode is set),
Means that may set the third section when a predetermined condition (for example, winning an AT lottery) is satisfied,
The directing means is
There is a case where the first production (for example, display of the background in high probability mode) is executed based on the second section being set by the game control means,
A second effect (for example, effect in AT state, operation navigation) may be executed based on the fact that the third section is set by the game control means,
When the second section is set in the second game state that is first set after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the first effect may not be executed (see operation example (F3)),
When the second section is set during the period from when the power is turned on without the predetermined operation until the game is played a predetermined number of times, the first effect may not be executed (see operation example (F4)),
When the third section is set after the power is turned on without the predetermined operation until the game of the predetermined number of times is completed, the second effect is executed (for example, the effect in the AT state is executed regardless of the first morning flag, and step S3105 in FIG. 93 precedes S3113).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The predetermined condition is
A condition that may be satisfied when the first game state ends and the second game state is set (operation example (F7), a modification in which a direct hit lottery is executed when transitioning from state A to state B),
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means may execute a different effect from the first effect if power is cut off while the first effect is being executed and then the power is turned on without the predetermined operation (for example, FIG. 107).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means performs a predetermined lottery when the second section is set in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, and the first effect is executed based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery (for example, a configuration that determines the setting of the first flag in the morning by lottery).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The directing means is
A first effect (for example, normal background) may be executed in the first game state,
The first effect may be executed in the first section of the second game state,
Means that may execute the first effect when the first effect is not executed in the second section of the second game state (for example, when the first flag in the morning is on, the normal background is displayed instead of the background in the high probability mode).
A game machine characterized by:

Further, in the amusement machine described above,
The effect means does not execute the first effect when the second section is set first in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation (operation example (F6), the conditions for canceling the first morning flag are "conditions satisfied when the first high probability mode that was set after the power is turned on and the transition from state A to state B ends" and "if the set value is changed, it is satisfied when the first high probability mode ends. "cancellation conditions"),
A game machine characterized by:

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 display window 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 157 effect image display device 272, 277 speaker 420 various lamps 300 main control section 400 first sub-control section 500 second sub-control section

Claims (1)

a game control means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states;
setting change means capable of changing setting values with different degrees of advantage;
A game machine comprising a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production,
The setting change means is a means for entering a state in which the setting value can be changed by turning on the power with a predetermined operation,
The plurality of game states include a first game state and a second game state,
The game control means is
Setting the second game state following the first game state,
After the end of the second game state, newly set the first game state,
When the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the first game state is set,
Means for setting any one of a plurality of types of game intervals in the second game state,
The plurality of types of game sections include a first section and a second section that is more advantageous than the first section,
The game control means is a means that may set the second section based on the fact that the first game state is completed and the second game state is set,
The directing means is
A predetermined effect may be executed based on the second section being set by the game control means,
When the second section is set in the second game state that is set first after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation, the predetermined effect may not be executed,
Means for not executing the predetermined effect when the second interval is set during a period from when the power is turned on without the predetermined operation until the game is played a predetermined number of times,
The effect means may execute the predetermined effect when the second section is set in the second game state initially set after the power is turned on with the predetermined operation.
A playground characterized by:

Images